Panasonic FP7 Series Command Reference Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 400 / 1222

background image

8.6 BITL (Left Shift of Multiple Devices for n Bits)

■

Ladder diagram

■

Available operation units (●: Available)

Operatio

n unit

bit

US

SS

UL

SL

SF

DF

i

●

■

List of operands

Operand

Description

D1

Starting address of the devices to be shifted (data format: according to the operation unit)

D2

End address of the devices to be shifted (data format: according to the operation unit)

n

The device address where the number of shift bits is stored, or the constant

■

Available bit devices (●: Available)

Operand

Bit device

Specification of bit of

word device

Index modifier

X

Y

R

L

T

C

P

E

S
R

IN

O

T

DT.n

LD.n

D1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

D2

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

■

Available word devices (●: Available)

Operan

d

16-Bit device:

32-Bit

device:

Integer

Real

numbe

r

St

rin

g

Index

modifie

r

W

X

W

Y

W

R

W

L

W

S

S
D

D

T

L

D

U

M

WI

W

O

TS

C
S

TE

C
E

IX

K

Ｕ

H SF

D

F

" "

n

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

(Note 1)

Only 16-bit devices, 32-bit devices, and integer constants can be modified. (Real number constants,
and character constants cannot be specified.)

■

Outline of operation

● This instruction shifts the range from [D1] to [D2] to the left by [n] bits.
● The starting address of the bit is specified by [D1], and the end address by [D2].

8.6 BITL (Left Shift of Multiple Devices for n Bits)

8-12

WUME-FP7CPUPGR-12

«
...
398
399
400
401
402
...
»

Summary of Contents for FP7 Series

Page 1: ...PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP7 CPU Unit Command Reference Manual Applicable Models FP7 CPU Unit CPS4RE CPS3RE CPS3R CPS2R CPS4RES CPS3RES CPS3RS WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 2022 11 panasonic net id pidsx global ...

Page 2: ... MEMO 2 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 3: ...n WUME FP7CPUETEX FP7 CPU Unit User s Manual EtherNet IP Communication WUME FP7CPUEIP Web Server Function Manual WUME FP7WEB Instructions for Built in COM Port FP7 Series User s Manual SCU Communication WUME FP7COM FP7 Extension Cassette Communication RS 232C RS485 type FP7 Extension Cassette Communication Ethernet Type FP7 Series User s Manual Communication Cassette Ethernet Type WUME FP7CCET FP7...

Page 4: ... FP7 Series User s Manual SCU Communication WUME FP7COM FP7 Multi wire Link Unit FP7 Multi wire Link Unit User s Manual WUME FP7MW FP7 Motion Control Unit FP7 Motion Control Unit User s Manual WUME FP7MCEC PHLS System PHLS System User s Manual WUME PHLS Programming Software FPWIN GR7 FPWIN GR7 Introduction Guidance WUME FPWINGR7 iv WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 5: ... Firmware version upgrades for the CPU unit are available for both new and old models When attaching expansion cassettes to the FP7CPU unit please use only old models or only new models Trying to attach a combination of old models and new models may cause damage Copyright and Trademarks Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd owns the copyright of this manual Unauthorized copying of this document...

Page 6: ...Indicates supplemental information Indicates details about the subject in question or information useful to remember Indicates operation procedures vi WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 7: ... 25 2 5 12 DT n Data register bit specification 2 26 2 5 13 LD n Link register bit specification 2 26 2 6 Description of the memory area 2 27 2 6 1 DT Data register 2 27 2 6 2 DT n Data register bit specification 2 28 2 6 3 LD Link register 2 28 2 6 4 LD n Link register bit specification 2 29 2 6 5 UM Unit memory 2 30 2 6 6 SD System data register 2 30 2 6 7 WX WY WR WL 2 31 2 6 8 WI WO 2 32 2 6 9...

Page 8: ...2 3 12 NOP 3 26 3 13 OT OT Leading Trailing Edge Out 3 27 3 14 KP Keep 3 29 3 15 SET RST Set Reset 3 31 3 16 ALT Alternate out 3 34 3 17 TM Timer 3 36 3 18 TM16 16 bit Timer 3 46 3 19 SPTM Unsigned 32 bit Incremental Auxiliary Timer 3 49 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 53 3 21 CT16 16 bit Counter 3 63 3 22 UDC Up Down Counter 3 66 3 23 SR Shift Register 3 69 3 24 LRSR Left Right Shift Register 3 73 3 25 MC...

Page 9: ...n Start 3 133 3 47 AN AN AN AN AN AN Data Comparison AND 3 136 3 48 OR OR OR OR OR OR Data Comparison OR 3 139 4 High level Instructions Data Comparison 4 1 4 1 CMP Data Compare 4 2 4 2 WIN Band Compare 4 6 4 3 BCMP Block Comparison 4 9 5 High level Instructions Data Transfer 5 1 5 1 MV Data Transfer 5 2 5 2 MV Inversion and Transfer 5 4 5 3 MV2 2 Data Transfer 5 6 5 4 MV3 3 Data Transfer 5 8 5 5 ...

Page 10: ...vision 6 28 6 14 BCDINC BCD Data Increment 6 30 6 15 BCDDEC BCD Data Decrement 6 32 6 16 AND Logical Conjunction 6 34 6 17 OR Logical Disjunction 6 36 6 18 XOR Exclusive OR 6 38 6 19 XNR Exclusive NOR 6 40 6 20 COMB Combination 6 42 7 High level Instructions Data Conversion 7 1 7 1 INV Data Inversion 7 2 7 2 NEG Sign Inversion 7 4 7 3 ABS Absolute Value 7 6 7 4 EXT Sign Extension 7 8 7 5 BCD Conve...

Page 11: ...of Data 8 24 8 13 RCR Right Rotation of Data with Carry Flag Data 8 26 8 14 RCL Left Rotation of Data with Carry Flag Data 8 28 8 15 CMPR Data Table Shift Out and Compress 8 30 8 16 CMPW Data Table Shift In and Compress 8 32 8 17 DEFBUF Buffer Definition 8 34 8 18 FIFR Data Read First In First Out 8 37 8 19 BUFW Data Write 8 40 8 20 LIFR Data Read Last In First Out 8 42 8 21 DEFRBUF Ring Buffer De...

Page 12: ... Tangent Operation 11 7 11 4 ASIN Arcsine Operation 11 9 11 5 ACOS Arccosine Operation 11 11 11 6 ATAN Arctangent Operation 11 13 11 7 ATAN2 Conversion Coordinate Data Angle Radian 11 15 11 8 SINH Hyperbolic Sine Operation 11 17 11 9 COSH Hyperbolic Cosine Operation 11 19 11 10 TANH Hyperbolic Tangent Operation 11 21 11 11 EXP Exponential Operation 11 23 11 12 LN Natural Logarithmic Operation 11 2...

Page 13: ...Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits 11 71 11 32 ROFF Conversion Floating Point Real Number Data Integer Round to the Nearest Unit 11 75 11 33 DROFF Conversion Double precision Real Number Integer Round to the Nearest Unit 11 78 12 High level Instructions Time 12 1 12 1 HMSS Conversion Time Data Hours Minutes and Seconds Seconds Data 12 2 12 2 SHMS Conversion Seconds Data Time Data Hours Minut...

Page 14: ...BIN Conversion Decimal ASCII BIN 14 26 14 9 BTOA Conversion BIN ASCII 14 30 14 10 ACHK ASCII Data Check 14 44 14 11 ATOB Conversion ASCII BIN 14 46 14 12 SSET Conversion Character Constant ASCII Code 14 60 14 13 PRINT Text Creation 14 64 14 14 PRINT EPRINT Instruction Shared Conversion Form Table 14 70 14 15 TIMEstr Date and Time Character String Conversion 14 75 14 16 SCMP String Compare 14 81 14...

Page 15: ... GPRECV General Purpose Communication Receive Instruction 15 15 15 4 SEND MEWTOCOL Master MODBUS Master 15 21 15 5 RECV MEWTOCOL Master MODBUS Master 15 29 15 6 SEND MODBUS Master Function Code Specification 15 37 15 7 RECV MODBUS Master Function Code Specification 15 44 15 8 PMSET pPMSET Change of SCU Parameters 15 51 15 9 PMGET Acquiring SCU Parameters 15 58 15 10 CONFIG Change Configuration 15 ...

Page 16: ... 22 SMTPcSV Mail Server Setting 17 108 17 23 SMTPcADD Destination Group Setting 17 115 17 24 SMTPcSET Mail Transmission Setting 17 120 17 25 SMTPcLOG Logging Trace Mail Setting 17 130 17 26 SMTPcREQ Mail Send Request 17 135 17 27 SMTPcCTL Mail Transmission Control 17 139 17 28 ETSTAT Acquiring EtherNet IP Information 17 142 17 29 EIPNDST EtherNet IP Node Status Acquisition Instruction 17 148 17 30...

Page 17: ... 1 Common precautions 19 2 19 2 Clock and Time Data 19 3 19 3 Data Table for String Instructions 19 5 19 4 Floating Point Real Number Operation 19 6 19 5 Changing Timer Counter Set Value in the RUN Mode 19 7 19 5 1 Method to rewrite a constant in a program 19 7 19 5 2 Method to rewrite a value in the set value area 19 8 19 5 3 Method 1 Use the tool software FPWIN GR7 19 8 19 5 4 Method 2 Using a p...

Page 18: ... MEMO xviii WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 19: ...1 List of Instructions 1 1 List of Basic Instructions 1 2 1 2 List of High level Instructions 1 8 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 1 1 ...

Page 20: ...n when the leading edge of the trigger is detected P 3 9 Falling edge Contact instructions AN Connects a normally open contact serially only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected P 3 9 Rising edge Contact instructions OR Connects a normally open contact in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected P 3 10 Falling edge Contact instructions O...

Page 21: ...3 27 Keep KP Turns ON at set input trigger and holds until reset trigger turns ON P 3 29 Set SET Output is set to and held at ON P 3 31 Reset RST Output is set to and held at OFF P 3 31 Alternate out ALT Inverts the output condition ON OFF each time the leading edge of the trigger is detected P 3 34 Basic function instructions Name Mnemon ic Symbol Function overview Page Timer 32 bit TM On delay t...

Page 22: ... conditions are OFF output between MC and MCE is turned OFF Executes the program between MC and MCE instructions when the execution condition is ON P 3 76 Master control relay end MCE P 3 76 Jump JP Jumps to the LBL instruction with the same number when the execution condition is ON and executes the program P 3 81 Label LBL P 3 81 Loop LOOP Jumps to the LBL instruction with the same number when th...

Page 23: ...r execution condition is ON subroutine is executed When the trigger execution condition is OFF subroutine is not executed Holds the output from within subroutines P 3 111 Output OFF Type Local Subroutine Call FCALL When the trigger execution condition is ON subroutine is executed When the trigger execution condition is OFF subroutine is not executed However the output from within subroutines is cl...

Page 24: ...B when the execution condition turns ON P 3 127 PBn Execution Stop STOPPG Puts the active PB into waiting mode when the execution condition turns ON P 3 127 Global PB Number Setting GPB Declares the global PB number n 1000 to 1999 for the PB in which GPB instruction is written P 3 130 Commenting Instructions Name Mnemon ic Symbol Function overview Page Comment Out COMOU T Comments out the instruct...

Page 25: ...6 AN The conducting contacts are connected in series if S1 S2 P 3 136 AN The conducting contacts are connected in series if S1 S2 P 3 136 AN The conducting contacts are connected in series if S1 S2 P 3 136 Data Comparison OR US SS UL SL SF DF OR The conducting contacts are connected in parallel if S1 S2 P 3 139 OR The conducting contacts are connected in parallel if S1 S2 P 3 139 OR The conducting...

Page 26: ...f bytes specified by S2 according to the control data specified by S1 and outputs the result to the system relay SRB When the blocks match SRB turns ON When the blocks do not match SRB turns OFF P 4 9 Data Transfer Instructions Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page Data Transfer US SS UL SL SF DF MV P S D S D P 5 2 Data Inversion and Transfer US SS UL SL SF DF MV P S D S D P...

Page 27: ...ied by D and subsequent addresses P 5 26 Block Transfer 32 bit Data to 16 bit Data BKMV16 P S1 S2 D Transfers only the lower one word of data in the area specified by S1 to S2 to an area after the area specified by D all at once P 5 28 Data exchange US SS UL SL SF DF XCH P D1 D2 D1 D2 D2 D1 P 5 30 Higher byte Exchange of lower bytes US SS SWAP P S D Exchanges the higher and lower order bytes of S ...

Page 28: ...P 6 4 Multiplication US SS UL SL SF DF MUL P S1 S2 D S1 S2 D D n n changes according to the operation unit P 6 6 Saturation Multiplication US SS UL SL MLCLIP P S1 S2 D S1 S2 D P 6 9 Division US SS UL SL SF DF DIV P S1 S2 D S1 S2 Quotient D P 6 11 Division With a remainder US SS UL SL DIVMOD P S1 S2 D S1 S2 Quotient D Remainder D n n changes according to the operation unit P 6 13 Division FP2 Compa...

Page 29: ...and Function overview Page Logical conjunction US SS UL SL AND P S1 S2 D S1 S2 D P 6 34 Logical disjunction US SS UL SL OR P S1 S2 D S1 S2 D P 6 36 Exclusive OR US SS UL SL XOR P S1 S2 D S1 S2 S1 S2 D P 6 38 Exclusive NOR US SS UL SL XNR P S1 S2 D S1 S2 S1 S2 D P 6 40 Combination US SS UL SL COMB P S1 S2 S3 D S1 S3 S2 S3 D P 6 42 Data conversion instructions Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand F...

Page 30: ...words data of the 16 bit data starting with S are combined and stored in D P 7 23 Digit Disintegration US DIST P S n D Each digit of the data of S is separated and stored in each of the least significant digits of the 16 bit data starting with D P 7 25 Byte Data Unification BUNI P S n D The least significant bytes of the n words data of the 16 bit data starting with S are combined and stored in th...

Page 31: ...o D2 to the right P 8 14 Left shift of block area for n words US SS WSHL P D1 D2 n Shifts n words of the area of D1 to D2 to the left P 8 16 n digit Right Shift of Block Area US SS WBSR P D1 D2 n Shifts n digits of the area of D1 to D2 to the right P 8 18 n digit Left Shift of Block Area US SS WBSL P D1 D2 n Shifts n digits of the area of D1 to D2 to the left P 8 20 Data rotation instructions Name...

Page 32: ...data from the area indicated by the LIFO pointer of the LIFO buffer starting with S and stores it in D P 8 42 Ring Buffer Definition DEFRBU F P n D Defines the area of n words starting with D as the data buffer area to be used for RBUFW instruction P 8 45 Write to Ring Buffer Calculation of Total Value and Moving Average Value US SS RBUFW P S D Reads data from the area indicated by the read pointe...

Page 33: ...f where the minimum value was first detected in the area starting with D P 10 13 Obtainment of the Total and the Mean US SS UL SL SF DF MEAN P S1 S2 D Calculates the total and the average of the data stored in S1 to S2 and stores it in the area starting with D P 10 19 Sort US SS UL SL SF DF SORT P S1 S2 S3 Changes the order of the data stored in S1 to S2 The sorting conditions are specified in S3 ...

Page 34: ...te 1 Since PID instruction and EZPID instruction hold the operation description it is necessary to set the execution condition to always ON Data Control Instructions Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page Data Revision Detection US SS UL SL SF DF DTR P S D Detects revisions in the data of S and reflects it to the carry flag SR9 D is used as an area for holding the previous da...

Page 35: ...e RAMP instruction and FILTER instruction hold the operation description it is necessary to set the execution condition to always ON Floating Point Real Number Function Instructions Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page Sine Operation SF DF SIN P S D SIN S D P 11 3 Cosine Operation SF DF COS P S D COS S D P 11 5 Tangent Operation SF DF TAN P S D TAN S D P 11 7 Arcsine Operat...

Page 36: ...Conversion Degrees Radian SF DF RAD P S D Converts the angle data in degrees of S to angle data in radians and stores it in D P 11 33 Conversion Radian Degrees SF DF DEG P S D Converts the angle data in radians of S to angle data in degrees and stores it in D P 11 35 Floating Point Real Number Data Rounding the First Decimal Point Down SF DF FINT P S D Rounds down the first decimal point of the re...

Page 37: ... real number data stored in the area starting with S into mantissa and exponent according to the operation unit i P 11 49 Combining of Mantissa and Exponent and Conversion of Single precision or Double precision Real Number SF DF UNIF P S1 S2 D Combines the data of mantissa and exponent stored in the areas starting with S1 and S2 according to the operation unit i P 11 52 Conversion Integer Single ...

Page 38: ...wn and stores them in D P 11 68 Conversion Double Precision Real Number Data Integer Rounding the First Decimal Point Down US SS UL SL DFIX P S D Converts S real number data to a signed 32 bit integer rounding the first decimal point down and stores it in D P 11 71 Conversion Single precision Floating Point Real Number Data Integer Rounding to the Nearest Unit US SS UL SL ROFF P S D Converts the s...

Page 39: ... P S D Converts the clock data specified by S to seconds data from the base time Jan 1 2001 and stores it in D 1 D P 12 10 Seconds Data from the Base Time Clock Data SECTM P S D Converts the seconds data from the base time Jan 1 2001 stored in S 1 S to clock data and stores it in D to D 5 P 12 12 Setting of Clock Calendar TIMEWT P S Sets the clock data year month date hour minute second stored in ...

Page 40: ...escribed right before the program which starts positioning Specify Slot No Axis No Table No for S1 S2 S3 P 13 19 Acquire Axis Status PSTRD P S1 S2 D Reads the main flag status as the axis status for Axis No S2 of the start positioning unit equipped to Slot No S1 and stores it in D P 13 21 Acquire Positioning Unit Error Warning PERRD P S1 S2 D Reads the error codes and warning codes stored in the a...

Page 41: ...2 1 4 3 Example 2 H1234 H 34 33 32 31 4 3 2 1 P 14 16 Conversion Decimal ASCII BCD US UL ABCD P S1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to BCD data and stores it in the area starting with D The conversion method is specified by S2 Example 1 H 34 33 32 31 H 3412 4 3 2 1 Example 2 H 34 33 32 31 H 1234 4 3 2 1 P 14 19 Conversion BIN Decimal ASCII US SS UL SL BINA P S1 S2 D Converts the...

Page 42: ...ecified by D P 14 75 String operation instructions Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page String compare SCMP P S1 S2 Compares the character string of S1 with the character string of S2 and outputs the result to the system relay SRA to SRC S1 S2 SRA ON S1 S2 SRB ON S1 S2 SRC ON P 14 81 String Addition SADD P S1 S2 D Couples the character string of S1 with the character string...

Page 43: ...truction With Storage Area Size Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page Conversion Character Constant ASCII Code ESSET P S D Converts the character constant specified by S to ASCII code and stores it in the area starting with D The storage area size is specified at the head P 14 104 Text Creation With Storage Area Size EPRINT P S1 S2 D Inserts the data to be output S2 to the t...

Page 44: ...cter string table starting with S1 and stores it in D P 14 136 Rewrite from a Given Position in the String EMIDW P S1 S2 D n Reads the character string data for S2 number of characters from the character string table starting with S1 and stores it in D from the position of the n th byte P 14 139 Replacement of a Character String ESREP P S D p n Replaces the character string table starting with D w...

Page 45: ...Specification US SS SEND P S n D1 D2 D3 Reads the data from devices within the master unit starting with S and stores the data in the partner station number D1 from the address starting with D2 The MODBUS function code and station No are specified by D1 and the number of sent data is specified by n P 15 37 MODBUS Master Receive Instruction Function Code Specification US SS RECV P S1 S2 n D1 D2 Rea...

Page 46: ...h S2 and stores it in the device of the master unit starting with D1 The number of received data is specified by n P 16 6 Acquiring MEWNET W Parameters PMGET P S D Reads the communication status set for MEWNET W and the operations of the PLC link and stores them in the area starting with D P 16 10 Obtainment of MEWNET W2 Parameters PMGET P S D Reads the communication status set for MEWNET W2 and t...

Page 47: ...t Unit FTP HTTP SMTP ETSTAT P S1 S2 D Stores the unit information FTP HTTP SMTP specified by S1 and S2 in the area starting with D P 17 15 Note 1 IP Address Setting IPv4SET P S Sets the IP address with the setting parameters stored in the device address starting with S or the number of character constants The subnet mask and default gateway can be omitted P 17 23 Note 1 PING request pPINGREQ S D I...

Page 48: ...lient transfer control FTPcCT L P S1 S2 Controls whether to enable disable or cancel the transfer of the FTP client according to the specification of the control description S2 for control target S1 P 17 77 Note 1 Note 1 Can be used with CPU units CPS4RE CPS3RE Ethernet Communication Instruction HTTP Client Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page HTTP client connected server s...

Page 49: ...ransmission of the mail with the transmission No specified by S P 17 135 Note 1 Mail Transmission Control SMTPcC TL P S1 S2 Controls whether to enable disable or cancel the transmission of mail according to the specification of the control description S2 for control target S1 P 17 139 Note 1 Note 1 Can be used with CPU units CPS4RE CPS3RE Ethernet Communication Ethernet IP Instruction Name Operati...

Page 50: ...he area of the master unit starting with D1 The device type of the transfer source device is specified by the high bytes of S1 and the number of received data is specified by n P 17 201 Note 1 Note 1 Can be used with CPU units CPS4RE CPS3RE SD Memory Card Access Instruction Name Operatio n Unit Mnemonic Operand Function overview Page Write file to operation memory in BIN format US SS CDTWT P S n D...

Page 51: ...S2 S3 Copies the file specified by S1 to the file specified by S2 according to the parameter specified by S3 P 18 50 File move CMV P S1 S2 S3 Moves the file specified by S1 to the file specified by S2 according to the parameter specified by S3 P 18 53 Acquiring SD Memory Card Free Space UL CFREE P D Stores the free space amount of the SD memory card in the area specified by D in byte units P 18 56...

Page 52: ... MEMO 1 34 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 53: ...ter bit specification 2 26 2 5 13 LD n Link register bit specification 2 26 2 6 Description of the memory area 2 27 2 6 1 DT Data register 2 27 2 6 2 DT n Data register bit specification 2 28 2 6 3 LD Link register 2 28 2 6 4 LD n Link register bit specification 2 29 2 6 5 UM Unit memory 2 30 2 6 6 SD System data register 2 30 2 6 7 WX WY WR WL 2 31 2 6 8 WI WO 2 32 2 6 9 TS CS Timer Counter setti...

Page 54: ... 6 Character constant 2 45 2 8 Global Devices and Local Devices 2 46 2 9 Range of data that can be handled in the PLC 2 47 2 10 Overflow and Underflow 2 49 2 Overview of Instructions 2 2 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 55: ...low they are expressed by a combination of relay coils and contacts Available relays vary by instruction Refer to explanations for respective instructions ST AN Internal relay contact Bus bars ST OT OR OT Output coil Internal relay coil Input contact 1 4 0 Address X100 X101 R0 R0 R0 Y100 Basic function instructions There are a group of instructions that execute timer counter shift register and oth...

Page 56: ...ration time is shortened LOOP LBL Loop label When execution conditions are ON the part of a program between LBL and LOOP is repeated for specified times Step ladder instructions These instructions handle a section specified by SSTP to STPE as an independent process and operate sequential execution or branch execution Subroutine instructions These instructions call and execute subroutines when nece...

Page 57: ...umber Numerical data that specify data targeted by operation and or methods for processing Every Scan Execution Type and Differential Execution Type For high level instructions there are two execution types every scan execution type and differential execution type 1 Every Scan Execution Type This type of instruction is executed repeatedly for every scan while the internal relay is established Inte...

Page 58: ...after that instructions are not executed Instructions are not executed for the first scan if the internal relay for differential execution type instruction is established from the beginning when the mode is switched to RUN mode or when the power supply is turned on in RUN mode Internal relay Operation of instruction RUN Power ON Not executed Executed When differential execution instruction P instr...

Page 59: ... Precautions for Programming High level instructions and internal relay High level instructions are always used as a pair with internal relay When the operation result of the relay sequence circuit specified for an internal relay is ON the high level instruction is executed Example When the internal relay R0 is ON the MV instruction is executed and K0 is transferred to DT0 When using high level in...

Page 60: ...ruction and differential execution type instruction are being mixed for one internal relay perform the programming in the following manner Example 1 Define every scan execution type and differential execution type separately 2 1 Structure of Instructions 2 8 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 61: ...Example 2 Use PSHS RDS or POPS instruction 2 1 Structure of Instructions WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 2 9 ...

Page 62: ...ata the value of DT0 is transferred to DT100 When the operation unit is UL unsigned 32 bit data the values of DT0 to DT1 are transferred to DT100 to DT101 Example 2 When the operation units in comparison instructions vary When binary data 1111 1111 1111 1111 is included in DT0 S1 If the operation unit is US unsigned 16 bit data the value of S1 is handled as a positive number 65535 resulting in S1 ...

Page 63: ...ating point real number data 2 2250738585072014E 308 to 1 7976931348623158E 308 0 2 2250738585072014E 308 to 1 7976931348623158E 308 Operation units and available constants Available Operation unit K constant U constant H constant Real number String Name Size Sign 16bit 32bit 16bit 32bit 16bit 32bit SF DF US 16bit No SS Yes UL 32bit No SL Yes SF 32bit Yes DF 64bit Yes 2 2 Operation unit WUME FP7CP...

Page 64: ...elay that stores error conditions which are freely allocated by the user in the memory IN Direct input Maximum 1008 points 0 to 62F Relay for input output processing during operation independent of normal I O refresh OT Direct output Maximum 1008 points 0 to 62F DT n _DT n Bit specification of data register Maximum 1M words n 16 points 0 to 999423 n 0 to F Device for specifying a specific bit of t...

Page 65: ...a memory for storing the elapsed value of a counter It corresponds to the counter number I0 to IE Index modification register 15 double words I0 to IE Register used for modifying memory area addresses and or constants Note 1 Figures in the table indicate the number of devices that can be used in a program The actual number of input output points that can be used varies depending on the configurati...

Page 66: ...4 425985 589824 CPS2R Data register capacity words 131072 262144 List of constants Symbol Name No of operation bits Range K Signed decimal constant 16 32768 to 32767 32 2147483548 to 2147483547 Ｕ Unsigned decimal constant 16 0 to 65535 32 0 to 4294967295 H Hexadecimal constant 16 0 to FFFF 32 0 to FFFF FFFF SF Single precision floating point real number constant 32 1 175494E 38 to 3 402823E 38 0 1...

Page 67: ...allocated to the input contact can be used for external input X Only what is actually allocated to the output contact can be output for external output Y External outputs Y that are not allocated can be used as internal relays Allocation of numbers is decided according to the combination of units Timer contact T counter contact C and error alarm relay E The numbers of timer counter contacts corres...

Page 68: ... and communication instruction Refer to Available devices of the respective instructions Device no Decimal Bit no Hexadecimal Device type DT LD 1 2 3 0 1 2 9 A B F Example For word devices DT n DT0 0 DT0 1 DT0 F DT10 0 DT10 1 DT10 F DT20 0 DT20 1 DT20 F How to count memory area numbers The numbers of respective memory areas e g data register DT should be specified by decimal numbers This excludes ...

Page 69: ...s External outputs that are not allocated can be used as internal relays However they cannot be specified for hold type devices When used as contacts there are no restrictions on the number of times that can be used As a rule when you specify the relay as the output destination of operation results using OT and KP instructions the specification is limited to once in a program To prevent duplicate ...

Page 70: ...the Memory Configuration dialog box using the tool software FPWIN GR7 If the beginning of a hold type relay is specified using a word number relays before that point will be non hold types and subsequent relays will be hold types Hold type and non hold type settings can be set for each global device and local device Non hold type Hold type Memory configuration Setting of the no of local devices to...

Page 71: ...t turns ON or OFF under specific conditions Can be used with the desired conditions in the program Normally ON relay SR10 ON OFF for each scan SR12 Initial pulse relay SR13 to SR14 clock pulse SR18 to SR1E 2 5 5 T Timer How timer T works When a timer is activated and the set time elapses the timer contact with the same number as the timer turns ON When the timer is in the time up state and the tim...

Page 72: ...hen used as contacts there are no restrictions on the number of times that can be used 2 5 7 L Link relay How link relay L works Link relays are relays for when multiple controllers are connected in a network as a PLC link relay for shared use between controllers If the operation result is output to a link relay coil on a PLC it is sent to other PLC connected in the network and the operation resul...

Page 73: ...on hold types and subsequent relays will be hold types For example when the Setting of the no of local devices to be used in total Global hold type start no in the Memory configuration dialog box is set to 10 L0 to L9F will be non hold type and L100 to L63F will be hold type Take note that when using a relay as a receiving link relay even if you set the link relay to hold type in the system config...

Page 74: ...s are executed When used as the trigger the pulse relay only operates for one scan when the leading edge or trailing edge is detected Example 1 Differential execution at the leading edge for input X100 X100 P0 P0 R100 X100 P0 R100 Single scan Example 2 Differential execution at the trailing edge for input X101 P1 R101 X101 P1 X101 P1 R101 Single scan Usage restrictions Pulse relays are cleared whe...

Page 75: ...on first are stored in a memory area in the CPU unit System data register SD No Description SD80 SD81 Year month data Data for the calendar timer when the relay was initially turned ON SD82 SD83 Day hour data SD84 SD85 Minute second data SD60 Number of relays that are turned ON SD61 to SD79 Number of relays that are turned ON Information for up to 500 error alarm relays can be stored in the memory...

Page 76: ...N state X1 ON K3 K12 K5 K0 K0 SD60 SD61 SD62 SD63 SD64 K21 SD65 K3 K5 K0 K0 K21 R0 E12 RST Clearing all buffer areas To reset all error alarm relays use RST instruction to specify the system data register SD60 following the method shown below Clearing buffer areas and initial data Of the areas in which relay numbers are stored only SD60 and SD61 can be cleared by directly specifying the system dat...

Page 77: ... is updated when the operation is executed This is effective for controls that require a high speed response This is specified in the program with a combination of a slot number S1 S2 and a corresponding address IN0 IN1 When using direct input IN it is necessary to select the setting to exclude this unit from the target for I O refresh when configuring the settings for the I O map 2 5 11 OT Direct...

Page 78: ...for I O refresh when configuring the settings for the I O map 2 5 12 DT n Data register bit specification Refer to 2 6 2 DT n Data register bit specification 2 5 13 LD n Link register bit specification Refer to 2 6 4 LD n Link register bit specification 2 5 Explanations about Relays 2 26 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 79: ... register which remembers the ON OFF status immediately before the data register is stopped and can resume operation using the same status after restarting 2 Non hold type data register which resets the status when the data register is stopped Hold type and non hold type settings can be set for each global device and local device You can set the range of hold and non hold types in Setting of the n...

Page 80: ...se If the ON OFF status changes for any of the bit data of the data register DT n the value of the data register DT also changes 2 6 3 LD Link register How link register LD works Link register is data memory for when control units are connected in a network as a PLC link data memory for shared use between control units When data is written to the link register of a PLC the same contents are stored...

Page 81: ...topped You can configure the settings for the range of hold and non hold types in Setting of the no of local devices to be used in total Global hold type start no in the Memory Configuration dialog box Take note that when using a link register as a receiving link register even if you set the link register to hold type in the configuration hold operations will not be performed Hold type and non hol...

Page 82: ...t hexadecimal H 0 to H 7FFFF Maximum In the program an address is specified with a corresponding slot number S1 S2 Unit memory UM usage example The following is an example of transferring the constant H0 to the address H 00081 of the unit memory UM of slot number 1 2 6 6 SD System data register How system data register SD works System data register is a memory area in which designated contents are...

Page 83: ... week tracked by the calendar timer are stored here 2 6 7 WX WY WR WL How WX WY WR WL works Relays X Y R L can be handled as blocks of 16 points Pulse relays P and error alarm relays E cannot be handled in word units These are one word 16 bit memory areas thus they can be treated as data memory The composition of the word unit memory areas is shown below Each element has a corresponding number as ...

Page 84: ...ys IN OT can be handled as blocks of 16 points These are one word 16 bit memory areas thus they can be treated as data memory The composition of the word unit memory areas is shown below Each element has a corresponding number as shown below WR0 INF INE IND INC INB INA IN9 IN8 IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 WR1 IN1F IN1E IN12 IN11 IN10 WR2 IN2F IN2E IN22 IN21 IN20 2 6 Description of the memory ar...

Page 85: ...tor 16 bit words Precautions for use If an ON or OFF status of one of the relays composing the memory area changes the memory area value will also change 2 6 9 TS CS Timer Counter setting value register How the set value area TS CS works A set value for a timer TS or counter CS is stored in the set value area with the same number as the timer or counter To set the value specify a decimal number or...

Page 86: ...be performed with the programming tool Reference Numbers of TS and TE correspond to timer numbers and numbers of CS and CE correspond to counter numbers Timer and counter No Set value area Process value area T0 T1 T4095 TS0 TS1 TS4095 TE0 TE1 TE4095 C0 C1 C1023 CS0 CS1 CS1023 CE0 CE1 CE1023 Timer counter settings for FP7 series can be specified using unsigned constants U constants The set value ar...

Page 87: ...hich stores a decimal number from 0 to 4 294 967 295 Using the elapsed value area TE CE The elapsed value of a timer or counter in operation can be changed to prolong or shorten the operation The values in the elapsed value area can be overwritten by user programs such as data transfer instructions Reading and writing of values can also be performed with the programming tool Precautions for progra...

Page 88: ...f the memory area used for a basic instruction Slot number or memory area number Number of the memory area used for a high level instruction Value of the constant specified for a high level instruction K constant 16 bit 32 bit U constant 16 bit 32 bit H constant 16 bit 32 bit Value that cannot be modified with index registers Floating point data Depending on the instruction index modification cann...

Page 89: ...r DT for the transfer destination varies according to the value of DT0 Example When the value of DT0 is U8 the value in DT108 is transferred to DT200 Modifying an address Address basic address value of I0 to IE I0DT11 Standard address I0 value Targeted address 11 11 11 K0 K10 K 10 DT11 DT21 DT1 2 6 Description of the memory area WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 2 37 ...

Page 90: ...output relay Y and internal relay R when using index modification on relay numbers be aware that the last digit of the relay number is hexadecimal and the higher digits are decimal Example For external input X X Decimal 1 2 3 12 Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 9 A B F X 0 X 1 X F X10 X11 X1F X20 X21 X2F Examples of index modification Value of index register Post modification relay number K H 0 0 X0 1 1 X1 9 9...

Page 91: ...cification of a label number in a jump instruction Modify JP1 JP I01 Specification of a label number in a loop instruction Modify LOOP5 LOOP I05 Subroutine program number Modify CALL10 CALL I010 Limitations for modifying the timer counter number The timer number and counter number can only be modified when a memory area has been specified for the setting value TS 0 TMXI0 0 Specified by a memory ar...

Page 92: ...it specification of data register the maximum number of DT that can be specified is 32767 Limitations for modifying LD n bit specification of link register When modifying LD n bit specification of link register the maximum number of LD that can be specified is 16383 2 6 Description of the memory area 2 40 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 93: ...s a negative sign Data is normally handled in units of one word 16 bits however it is also occasionally handled in units of two words 32 bits In this case as well the most significant bit serves as the sign bit Format for signed decimal constant K Example Decimal 32 K32 Example Decimal 32 K 32 Range that can be specified using a decimal constant K Operation Available range 16 bit operation K 32 76...

Page 94: ...g a decimal constant U Operation Available range 16 bit operation U0 to U65 535 32 bit operation U0 to U4 294 967 295 2 7 3 H Hexadecimal constant How hexadecimal constant H works The constant is a value which has been converted from binary data into hexadecimal data When entering and reading the constant specify H before the numerical value Hexadecimal constants are primarily used to specify an o...

Page 95: ... necessary to worry about data format while programming 16 15 0 Mantissa portion 23 bits 22 30 31 Exponent portion 8 bits Sign bit 1 bit 23 Range of single precision floating point real number constants Operation Available range 32 bit operation Negative range 1 175494E 38 to 3 402823E 38 0 Positive range 3 402823E 38 to 1 175494E 38 Storage area for single precision floating point real number con...

Page 96: ...programming 16 15 0 Mantissa portion 52 bits 32 31 48 47 51 52 62 63 Exponent portion 11 bits Sign bit 1 bit Range of double precision floating point real number constants Operation Available range 64 bit operation Negative range 2 2250738585072014E 308 to 1 7976931348623158E 308 0 Positive range 2 2250738585072014E 308 to 1 7976931348623158E 308 Storage area for double precision floating point re...

Page 97: ...ose characters with The instruction for which character constants can be set is SSET instruction conversion of character constant ASCII code This can only be input using the tool software Character constants are stored as ASCII code in the specified memory area in the PLC as shown below Format for character constants Example When character constant MEWNET is input 54 45 4E 57 45 4D T E N W E M Cha...

Page 98: ...ween multiple program blocks PB for external input output or other purposes Program block A Program block B DT100 Refer to the same area Local devices If data of local device dt10 is changed in either program block A or B since the local device is allocated to different data memory the data for one program block will not be overwritten by the other program block Program block A Program block B _DT...

Page 99: ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 U 1 K 1 H1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 K 0 H0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 U4294967295 K 1 HFFFFFFFF 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U2147438648 K 2147438648 H80000000 Range of data that can be handled in the PLC Type of operation Operational...

Page 100: ...16 32 64 128 256 512 The other bits indicate the data size 1 024 512 256 64 8 4 1868 The highest digit bit is 0 representing a positive figure 3 For negative numbers 2 s complement is used 2 s complement is binary data in which 0 and 1 are inverted in the binary data for the positive number and then 1 is added to the binary data Example Representation of the decimal 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0...

Page 101: ...Maximum value U65535 HFFFF K32767 H7FFF U32768 H8000 K 1 H1 U32767 H7FFF K 0 H0 K 1 HFFFF U 1 H1 Minimum value U 0 H0 K 32768 H8000 Lower than the minimum value is underflow 32 bit operation Higher than the maximum value is overflow Unsigned Signed Maximum value U4294967295 HFFFFFFFF K2147483647 H7FFFFFFF U2147483648 H80000000 K 1 H1 U2147483647 H7FFFFFFF K 0 H0 K 1 HFFFFFFFF U 1 H1 Minimum value ...

Page 102: ...F Signed K 32 767 H 7FFF U 32 768 H 8000 U 32 767 H 7FFF K 1 H 1 K 0 H 0 U 1 H 1 K 1 H FFFF H 8000 U 0 H 0 Max value Min value Max value Min value Overflow Underflow Max value and min value are linked Max value and min value are linked 2 10 Overflow and Underflow 2 50 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 103: ...Example 2 16 bit BCD operation H 9999 H 0 Max value Min value Overflow Underflow Max value and min value are linked 2 10 Overflow and Underflow WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 2 51 ...

Page 104: ... MEMO 2 52 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 105: ...tack 3 20 3 11 PSHS Push stack RDS Read stack POPS Pop stack 3 22 3 12 NOP 3 26 3 13 OT OT Leading Trailing Edge Out 3 27 3 14 KP Keep 3 29 3 15 SET RST Set Reset 3 31 3 16 ALT Alternate out 3 34 3 17 TM Timer 3 36 3 18 TM16 16 bit Timer 3 46 3 19 SPTM Unsigned 32 bit Incremental Auxiliary Timer 3 49 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 53 3 21 CT16 16 bit Counter 3 63 3 22 UDC Up Down Counter 3 66 3 23 SR Shif...

Page 106: ...e Subroutine Call with PB No Specification 3 115 3 39 INTPG Unit Interruption Program Start IRET Unit Interruption Program End 3 117 3 40 DI CPU Interruption Disable EI CPU Interruption Enable 3 122 3 41 IMASK Unit Interruption Disable Enable Setting 3 123 3 42 ICLR Unit Interruption Clear 3 125 3 43 STARTPG PBn Execution Start STOPPG PBn Execution Stop 3 127 3 44 GPB Global PB Number Setting 3 13...

Page 107: ...n ST Begins a logic operation by treating the input contact specified by the ST instruction as a Form A normally open ST Begins a logic operation by treating the input contact specified by the ST instruction as a Form B normally closed OT Outputs the operation result to the specified coil Operation Example Program operation of ST ST and OT in the ladder diagram Output to Y110 when R0 is ON and to ...

Page 108: ...ST and ST instructions are initiated from the bus bar When an external switch e g emergency stop switch is a Form B normally closed be sure to use the ST instruction in the program 3 1 ST ST OT START START NOT OUT 3 4 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 109: ...ction by treating the input contact specified by the AN instruction as a Form A normally open AN Executes an AND operation with the preceding operation result in serial connection by treating the input contact specified by the AN instruction as a Form B normally closed Operation Example Program operation of AN and AN in the ladder diagram When X100 and R1 turn ON and R2 turns OFF the result is out...

Page 110: ...ng operation result in parallel connection by treating the input contact specified by the OR instruction as a Form A normally open OR Executes an OR operation with the preceding operation result in parallel connection by treating the input contact specified by the OR instruction as a Form B normally closed Operation Example Program operation of OR and OR in the ladder diagram If any of the conditi...

Page 111: ...X100 R0 R1 Y110 Precautions for programming The OR and OR instructions are initiated from the bus bar The OR and OR instructions can be used consecutively 3 3 OR OR OR OR NOT WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 7 ...

Page 112: ... OFF to ON state rise Begins a logic operation by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed ST Conduction takes place for 1 scan only following the change of a signal from the ON to OFF state fall Begins a logic operation by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed Operation Example Program operation of ST in the ladder dia...

Page 113: ...ult in serial connection by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed AN Conduction takes place for 1 scan only following the change of a signal from the ON to OFF state fall Executes an AND operation with the preceding operation result in serial connection by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed Operation Example Progr...

Page 114: ...n parallel connection by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed OR Conduction takes place for 1 scan only following the change of a signal from the ON to OFF state fall Executes an OR operation with the preceding operation result in parallel connection by treating the input contact as a Form A normally open or Form B normally closed Operation Example Program...

Page 115: ...7 NOT Ladder diagram Outline of operation The instruction inverts the preceding operation result Operation Example X100 Y110 Y111 When X100 is ON Y110 is ON and Y111 is OFF 3 7 NOT WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 11 ...

Page 116: ...changes in the ON OFF states of a contact The DF and DF instructions do not generate output if the execution condition is already satisfied i e ON state when the operation mode is switched to RUN or the power is turned on in the RUN mode The DFI instruction generates output differential output for the first single scan even if the execution condition is already satisfied when the RUN mode is initi...

Page 117: ...ladder diagram X100 Y110 Leading edge Single scan Single scan Single scan Single scan Outputs to Y110 only for a single scan where X100 changes from the OFF state to the ON state i e rises Outputs to Y111 only for a single scan where X101 changes from the ON state to the OFF state i e falls Outputs to Y110 only for a single scan where X100 changes from the OFF state to the ON state i e rises Sampl...

Page 118: ...emains OFF even when X101 rises 3 While X101 is ON Y110 becomes ON for a single scan when X100 rises X100 X101 Y110 2 Example 2 using DF instruction When the leading edge differential is set after parallel connection of input information X100 X101 DF X100 X101 Y110 No output generated here 3 8 DF DF Leading Edge Differential Trailing Edge Differential DFI Leading Edge Differential Initial Executio...

Page 119: ...rential instructions Using differential instructions makes it easy to create and adjust programs Example of application to a self holding circuit Using a differential instruction allows longer input signals to be supported 3 8 DF DF Leading Edge Differential Trailing Edge Differential DFI Leading Edge Differential Initial Execution Type WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 15 ...

Page 120: ...example for alternating circuit Differential instructions can also be applied to an alternating circuit which uses a single signal to hold and release the circuit 3 8 DF DF Leading Edge Differential Trailing Edge Differential DFI Leading Edge Differential Initial Execution Type 3 16 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 121: ...X100 R0 R0 R0 Y110 Y110 Y110 Example 2 DF 3 8 DF DF Leading Edge Differential Trailing Edge Differential DFI Leading Edge Differential Initial Execution Type WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 17 ...

Page 122: ... series Each block should start with the ST instruction Operation Example In the above ladder diagram when X100 or X101 is ON and X102 or X103 is ON the signal is output to Y110 When blocks are consecutive When blocks are consecutive consider a block division as follows 3 9 ANS AND stack 3 18 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 123: ...3 9 ANS AND stack WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 19 ...

Page 124: ... Each block should start with the ST instruction Operation Example In the above ladder diagram when X100 and X101 are ON or X102 and X103 are ON the signal is output to Y110 When blocks are consecutive When blocks are consecutive consider a block division as follows 3 10 ORS OR Stack 3 20 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 125: ...3 10 ORS OR Stack WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 21 ...

Page 126: ...next step and resets the operation result saved by the PSHS instruction Saves a single operation result and reads it and performs multiple operations This instruction is used to branch from a single contact and connect to further contacts Operation Example 1 When X100 is ON the PSHS instruction saves the operation result and outputs it to Y110 if X101 is ON 2 The RDS instruction reads the operatio...

Page 127: ...ther used and the POPS instruction if it will not be used any more Be sure to use the POPS instruction at the end of a series of instructions The RDS instruction can be used repeatedly for an unlimited number of times 3 11 PSHS Push stack RDS Read stack POPS Pop stack WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 23 ...

Page 128: ...t run correctly if this limit is exceeded X100 X101 PSHS X108 Y110 PSHS PSHS PSHS 1st time 2nd time 8th time 9th time This PSHS instruction does not operate correctly If the POPS instruction is used while the PSHS instruction is used repeatedly the operation results will be read with the result saved by the last PSHS instruction first The numbers in the figure correspond to the instruction results...

Page 129: ...3 11 PSHS Push stack RDS Read stack POPS Pop stack WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 25 ...

Page 130: ...changing the program address write the NOP instruction over it To send the address of a program portion without modifying the program insert the NOP instruction For example this is a convenient means of breaking a long program into several blocks Sample program addresses 0 2 3 ST AN AN OT X100 X101 X102 Y100 addresses 0 2 3 4 ST AN NOP AN OT X100 X101 X102 Y100 NOP instruction is inserted here and...

Page 131: ... DT n LD n bit Outline of operation Type of instruction Operation OT Generates output only for a single scan where the preceding operation result changes from the OFF state to the ON state i e rises OT Generates output only for a single scan where the preceding operation result changes from the ON state to the OFF state i e falls 3 13 OT OT Leading Trailing Edge Out WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 27 ...

Page 132: ...e Single scan Outputs to the pulse relay P0 only for a single scan where X100 changes from the OFF state to the ON state i e rises Also outputs to P0 even if X100 is ON for the first scan Outputs to the pulse relay P1 only for a single scan where X101 changes from the ON state to the OFF state i e falls 3 13 OT OT Leading Trailing Edge Out 3 28 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 133: ...lease the output state when the reset input X101 turns ON While the state is being held the output state is held regardless of the ON or OFF state of the set input X100 until the reset input X101 is entered If the set input X100 and the reset input X101 turn ON simultaneously the reset input X101 will take precedence Operation Example X100 X101 R0 1 Turns ON the specified coil R0 output when X100 ...

Page 134: ... MC instruction is in operation The state will be reset when the operation mode is switched from RUN to PROG or the power is turned off However this is not the case when an internal relay set to the hold type is specified as the output destination 3 14 KP Keep 3 30 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 135: ...a change in the state of the execution condition RST When the execution condition turns ON the output coil turns OFF and the OFF state is held regardless of a change in the state of the execution condition Operation Example X100 R0 X101 1 When X100 turns ON R0 turns ON and its state is held 2 When X101 turns ON R1 turns OFF and its state is held Precautions for programming The same output coil can...

Page 136: ...ed as the output destination A pulse relay P cannot be specified as an output destination of the SET and RST instructions The error alarm buffer can be all cleared by RST SD60 The first entry of the error alarm buffer can be cleared by RST SD61 Processing mechanism of SET and RST instructions The output content is overwritten with each step during processing of the operation Since I O refresh is d...

Page 137: ...ons with differential instructions Putting the differential DF instructions before the SET and RST instructions makes it easy to create and adjust the program This is particularly effective when the same output destination is used in several places in the program 3 15 SET RST Set Reset WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 33 ...

Page 138: ...from the OFF to ON states rises Precautions for programming The ALT instruction detects rising from OFF to ON of the input and inverts the output While the input continues to be ON it is inverted only during rise After that it is not inverted The output will not be inverted for the first scan if the input is already ON when the operation mode is switched to RUN or the power is turned on in the RUN...

Page 139: ...4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 3 16 ALT Alternate out WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 35 ...

Page 140: ...d Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation The timer is the non hold type that is reset when the power is turned off or the operation mode is switched from RUN to PROG When the execution condition is ON the timer starts decrementing from the set time S When the elapsed value reaches 0 the timer contact Tn n is the timer contact number turns ON When the...

Page 141: ...both occupy 32 bit areas This is also true when a device such as DT is used in the operand S Be careful not to overwrite the areas with another program Since decrementing occurs during an operation create the program so that decrementing occurs once during a single scan time If multiple operations occur during a single scan due to an interruption handler program or jump loop instruction or decreme...

Page 142: ...E with the same number This is also true when the operation mode is switched to RUN while the execution condition is ON 3 For each scan the value in the elapsed value area TE decrements if the execution condition is ON 4 When the value in the elapsed value area TE becomes 0 the timer contact T with the same number turns ON 3 17 TM Timer 3 38 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 143: ...he set value Even when the value in the set value area TS is changed while decrementing the decrement operation continues with the value before change Timer operation starts with the changed value the next time the execution condition changes from OFF to ON after the decrement operation is completed or interrupted The setting area TS is normally the non hold type that is reset when the power is tu...

Page 144: ...rom the set value area TS to the elapsed value area TE with the same number This is also true when the operation mode is switched to RUN while the execution condition is ON 3 For each scan the value in the elapsed value area TE decrements if the execution condition is ON 3 17 TM Timer 3 40 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 145: ...4 When the value in the elapsed value area TE becomes 0 the timer contact T with the same number turns ON 3 17 TM Timer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 41 ...

Page 146: ... Application example of timer instructions serial connection of timers 3 17 TM Timer 3 42 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 147: ... Application example of timer instructions parallel connection of timers 3 17 TM Timer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 43 ...

Page 148: ... Application example of timer instructions When the set value area number is specified directly Example Switching set values according to the condition 3 17 TM Timer 3 44 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 149: ... number and a device number with index modification for the timer setting value On FPWIN GR7 input the timer instruction in the following order TM CT F5 TMX F1 5 ENTER INDEX F9 I0 F1 DT F5 0 ENTER 4 Timer number with index modificatio n Device No Setting a constant with index modification for the timer number and a device number for the timer setting value On FPWIN GR7 input the timer instruction ...

Page 150: ...ed from RUN to PROG When the execution condition is ON the timer starts decrementing from the set time S When the elapsed value reaches U0 the timer contact Tn n is the timer contact number turns ON When the execution condition turns OFF during the subtraction operation the elapsed value is reset cleared to zero The OT instruction can also be written immediately after a timer coil The timer set ti...

Page 151: ... ON When using a timer instruction with an AND stack ANS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction be sure to write the code correctly For details refer to 19 8 Precautions for Programming Difference between TM and TM16 instructions TM instruction When specifying operand S 16 bit device 32 bit data U131073 H20001 written in DT0 to DT1 is treated as the timer setting value U131073 is set in the ela...

Page 152: ... R0 rises The setting range of a constant is U0 to U65535 When a 32 bit value is written into the elapsed value area TE while the timer is being operated using an instruction such as MV instruction the timer operates with the written 32 bit value When a 32 bit value is written into the setting value area TS the timer operates with the written 32 bit value 3 18 TM16 16 bit Timer 3 48 WUME FP7CPUPGR...

Page 153: ...nstants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction operates as a 32 bit on delay timer with 0 01 second resolution When the execution condition is ON the timer increments in the area D D 1 where the elapsed time is specified When the elapsed value reaches the timer set value S the relay that is connected to the Timer inst...

Page 154: ...and 0 is transferred to the elapsed value area DT5 When executed with U500 in the set value S DT10 0 is transferred to the elapsed value area DT5 Precautions for programming Ensure that the specifications of the area storing the set value and the process value area do not overlap with other timer counter instructions or operation memory areas of high level instructions Since incrementing occurs du...

Page 155: ...e internal relay is ON 3 If the value for the elapsed value area D D 1 is equal to the value for S S 1 the relay used for the OT instruction and system relay SRD are ON Precaution when using system relay SRD When using multiple auxiliary timers with the SRD be sure use SRD on the line following the auxiliary timer instruction 3 19 SPTM Unsigned 32 bit Incremental Auxiliary Timer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 156: ... Example A correct operation cannot be obtained if specified as shown below 3 19 SPTM Unsigned 32 bit Incremental Auxiliary Timer 3 52 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 157: ...H SF D F n S Note 1 Only CS can be specified for CT instruction Outline of operation All counters are decremental preset counters When the reset input rises from OFF to ON the value in the set value area CS is preset to the elapsed value area CE When the reset input is ON the elapsed value is reset to 0 When the count input changes from OFF to ON the counter decrements from the set value When the ...

Page 158: ...rogramming The counter set value area CS and counter elapsed value area CE both occupy 32 bit areas This is also true when a device such as DT is used in the operand S Be careful not to overwrite the areas with another program When combining a counter instruction with an AND stack instruction or POP stack instruction be careful that the programming is correct Cautions on detecting the count input ...

Page 159: ...5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions Mechanism of down counter operation This is an example when the U constant is used to specify the set value See below for the operation when specifying the set value area number This example shows a case in which 100 is specified for the counter 1 When the operation mode is switched to RUN or the power is turned ON in the RUN mode the counter se...

Page 160: ...nput X100 turns ON the value in the elapsed value area CE is decremented 4 When the value in the elapsed value area CE becomes 0 the counter contact C with the same number turns ON 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 56 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 161: ...30 set to CS100 2 When the count input X101 is ON decrementing starts from the set value 30 Be sure to specify the same address as the counter number in S for the setting area CS Even when the value in the set value area CS is changed while decrementing the decrement operation continues with the value before change The new value will be used for the counter operation after the counter is reset and...

Page 162: ...on condition of the high level instruction is ON the value is set in the set value area CS The following shows an example of using the MV instruction 2 At the trailing edge of the reset input the value in the set value area CS is preset to the elapsed value area CE 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 58 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 163: ...nput X101 turns ON the value in the elapsed value area CE is decremented 4 When the value in the elapsed value area CE becomes 0 the counter contact C with the same number turns ON 3 20 CT Down Counter WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 59 ...

Page 164: ... Application example of counter instructions When the set value area number is specified directly Example Switching set values according to the condition 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 60 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 165: ...o Setting a constant for the counter number and a device number for the counter setting value 3 Constant Device number with Index modificati on Setting a constant for the counter number and a device number with index modification for the counter setting value On FPWIN GR7 input the counter instruction in the following order TM CT F5 CT F6 1 0 0 ENTER INDEX F9 I0 F1 DT F5 0 ENTER 3 20 CT Down Count...

Page 166: ...g a constant with index modification for the counter number and a device number for the counter setting value On FPWIN GR7 input the counter instruction in the following order TM CT F5 CT F6 INDEX F9 I0 F1 0 ENTER DT F5 0 ENTER Note 1 Refer to 2 6 11 I0 to IE Index registers 3 20 CT Down Counter 3 62 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 167: ...e CT instruction the range available for the setting value S for this instruction is U0 to U65535 All counters are decremental preset counters When the reset input falls from OFF to ON the value in the setting value area CS is preset to the elapsed value area CE When the reset input is ON the elapsed value is reset cleared to zero When the count input changes from the OFF state to the ON state the...

Page 168: ...ified for the setting value the count up operation is performed when the instruction is executed and the counter contact C turns ON Difference between CT and CT16 instructions CT instruction When specifying operand S 16 bit device 32 bit data U131073 H20001 written in DT0 to DT1 is treated as the counter setting value U131073 is set in the elapsed value area CE0 when the input of X101 falls CT16 i...

Page 169: ...nt is U0 to U4294967295 CT16 instruction When specifying operand S constant U100 is set in the setting value area CS0 when compiling the program The setting value area CS0 is set in the elapsed value area CE0 when the input of X101 falls The setting range of a constant is U0 to U65535 When a 32 bit value is written into the elapsed value area CE while the counter is being operated using an instruc...

Page 170: ... L D U M WI W O TS C S N ote 1 TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F n S Note 1 Only CS can be specified Outline of operation This counter can increment up count or decrement down count depending on the ON OFF state of the relay specified by the up down input The count operation is incremental counting 1 when the up down input is ON and decremental counting 1 when the up down input is OFF The elapsed value is st...

Page 171: ...nstruction Setting the count value The count value is specified within the range from U1 to 4294967295 using a decimal U constant Operation Example R2 R1 R0 Y150 10 0 CE100 CE100 1 When the reset input R2 changes from ON to OFF the set value U100 is transferred to the elapsed value CE100 This value is used as the target 2 When R1 turns ON while R0 is OFF 1 is subtracted from the elapsed value CE10...

Page 172: ...g is only performed at the rise so even if the count input remains on no further counting will occur The set value will not be incremented or decremented for the first scan if the count input is already ON when the operation mode is switched to RUN or the power is turned on in the RUN mode Count input Instruction operation RUN Power on Counted Not counted Be careful when using this instruction wit...

Page 173: ... numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D Outline of operation This instruction moves i e shifts the contents of the specified register WR specified operation unit to the left by one bit 1 When the shift input turns ON rises shifts the contents of WR to the left by one bit 3 23 SR Shift Register WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 69 ...

Page 174: ...ets 1 or 0 to the blank bit least significant bit if the data input is ON or OFF respectively 3 When the reset input turns ON the specified register contents will be cleared 3 23 SR Shift Register 3 70 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 175: ...re reset to 0 Precautions for programming The data input shift input and reset input are required for the SR instruction When reset input and shift input rise simultaneously reset input is prioritized Shift input Reset input Rn Note that if a hold type memory area is specified for the shift register it will not be automatically reset upon power ON When combining a shift register instruction with a...

Page 176: ...en using this instruction with an instruction that changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE or JP LBL 1 to 6 shown below because the operation of the instruction may change depending on the timing of the instruction execution and shift input 1 MC MCE instructions 2 JP LBL instructions 3 LOOP LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions R...

Page 177: ...tline of operation Left right shift is a shift register which shifts one bit of the specified data area to the left to the higher bit position or to the right to the lower bit position depending on the ON OFF state of the relay specified as the left right shift input The shift operation is made to the left when the left right shift input is ON and to the right when OFF Specify the same type of mem...

Page 178: ...st significant bit for right shift is set in the system relay SR9 carry flag 3 If the reset input is ON the contents of the specified area are cleared to 0 Operation diagram Left shift Right shift Precautions for programming The LRSR instruction detects rising from OFF to ON of the shift input and shifts the register contents If the shift input remains continuously ON a shift will only take place ...

Page 179: ...ruction execution and shift input 1 MC MCE instructions 2 JP LBL instructions 3 LOOP LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions When using an LRSR instruction with an AND stack ANS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction be sure to write the code correctly Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Turns ON when D1 address D2 address SR9 CY Turns ON...

Page 180: ...When the execution condition is OFF the state of each I O relay is as follows Type of instruction Operation OT All OFF KP Holds the state SET RST TM Reset CT Holds the current progress SR Differential instruction Refer to Operation of differential instructions between MC and MCE Note 1 Other instructions Not executed Note 1 The following items are included in differential instructions 3 25 MC Mast...

Page 181: ...ype high level instruction instruction specified by p and instruction name Operation Example X100 Execution condition X101 Y131 X102 Y132 Operation of differential instructions between MC and MCE If the differential instruction is used between MC and MCE the output obtained differs depending on the execution condition of MC and the input timing of the differential instruction as shown below 3 25 M...

Page 182: ...ecution Since the execution condition X101 for the differential instruction has changed from OFF to ON from the last execution differential output is obtained Last differential instruction execution Output will not be obtained if the same execution condition is specified for an MC instruction and a differential instruction If output is needed enter the differential instruction outside of the MC MC...

Page 183: ...air of the MC and MCE instructions can be nested within another pair of the MC and MCE instructions Up to 30 levels of nesting are allowed for MC and MCE 3 25 MC Master Control Relay MCE Master Control Relay End WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 79 ...

Page 184: ...he program cannot be executed in the following cases 1 MC or MCE is missing in a pair 2 The order of MC and MCE is reversed 3 25 MC Master Control Relay MCE Master Control Relay End 3 80 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 185: ... L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ N ote 1 H SF D F n Note 1 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation When the execution condition is ON this instruction jumps to the label with the specified number LBL instruction The program continues running from the instruction after the target label Operation Example When execution condition X101 turns ON ...

Page 186: ...n the program cannot end scanning and a WDT error may occur The JP and LBL instructions cannot be used in the step ladder area within the range from the SSTP to STPE instructions It is not possible to jump from the main program to a subprogram subroutine or interruption program after the ED instruction from a subprogram to the main program or between subprograms Be careful when using an instructio...

Page 187: ...ed value is retained 3 SR instruction Even if shift input is ON no shift is performed The contents of the specified register are retained If the LBL instruction is located at an address before the JP instruction each instruction is processed as follows when the JP instruction is executed LBL 1 JP 1 Executes repeatedly when the execution condition is on 1 TM instruction Multiple timings occur durin...

Page 188: ...nstruction no differential output is obtained Final timing with no execution of the last JP instruction Since the execution condition X101 for the differential instruction has changed from OFF to ON from the final timing with no execution of the last JP instruction differential output is obtained Final timing with no execution of the last JP instruction Timing Chart 1 3 26 JP LBL Jump Label 3 84 W...

Page 189: ...erential instruction has changed from OFF to ON from the final timing with no execution of the last JP instruction differential output is obtained Final timing with no execution of the last JP instruction Timing Chart 1 If the same execution condition is used for the JP and differential instructions rising or falling of the execution condition for the differential instruction will not be detected ...

Page 190: ...3 26 JP LBL Jump Label 3 86 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 191: ...operation If the condition is ON 1 is subtracted from the value in S If the result is not 0 the instruction jumps to the label with the specified number LBL instruction The program continues running from the instruction after the target label The LOOP instruction specifies the number of times to execute the code When the code has been executed for the number of times specified in S the program wil...

Page 192: ...e specified label but instead performs the next process The label is shared between the JP and LOOP instructions A label can be used as the jump destination for any instruction as many times as required The LBL instruction specifying the same number can only be written once in a single program If the jump destination label is not programmed a syntax error occurs 3 27 LOOP LBL LOOP Label 3 88 WUME ...

Page 193: ...d LBL 1 X100 LOOP 1 DT 0 Jumps repeatedly when the execution condition is on 1 TM instruction Clocking is not performed If it is not executed once during a single scan the correct time cannot be guaranteed 2 CT instruction Even if count input is ON counting is not performed The elapsed value is retained 3 SR instruction Even if shift input is ON no shift is performed The contents of the specified ...

Page 194: ...y exceed the WDT monitor time limit and a WDT error may occur The LOOP and LBL instructions cannot be used in the step ladder area within the range from the SSTP to STPE instructions It is not possible to jump from the main program to a subprogram subroutine or interruption program after the ED instruction from a subprogram to the main program or between subprograms Be careful when using an instru...

Page 195: ...gram area Subroutine program Normal program area ED The program area is divided into the regular program area main program and the subroutine and interruption program areas subprograms by this instruction Be sure to write the subroutine and interruption program after the ED instruction 3 28 ED End WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 91 ...

Page 196: ...3 29 EDPB End Program Block Ladder diagram Outline of operation This instruction indicates the end of PB program block 3 29 EDPB End Program Block 3 92 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 197: ...ion cannot be used in a subprogram e g subroutine Use in the main program area The CNDE instruction can be used for any number of times in the main program Be careful when using an instruction which detects the leading edge of the execution condition and runs 1 6 below including a differential instruction 1 DF leading edge differential instruction 2 Count input for CT counter instruction 3 Count i...

Page 198: ...am code with the tool software a page break will be added where this instruction is inserted Similarly to the NOP instruction no program processing will occur Operation Example EJECT R0 Y100 R1 Y101 R2 Y102 Page n Page n 1 Page break is inserted here 3 31 EJECT 3 94 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 199: ...t setting Program Devices that can be specified indicated by Operand Bit device Specification of bit of word device Index modifier X Y R L T C P E SR IN OT DT n LD n bit Outline of operation The NSTL instruction starts and executes a process which begins with the SSTP instruction with the specified number 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE Step End WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 95 ...

Page 200: ... necessary processes are switched and executed in order Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 Process 4 2 Selective branch control The processes are selected and executed according to conditions Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 Process 4 3 Parallel branch join control Multiple processes are executed simultaneously After each process is completed the next process is executed Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 Proc...

Page 201: ...dicates that process stopped Starts the process 2 by NSTL Stop Start Stop Stop SSTP Start Step Instruction This instruction indicates Start of output number n Be sure to write the SSTP n at the beginning of the program of the output number n Program code between SSTP n and the next SSTP or STPE is handled as the area with the output number n 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE...

Page 202: ...n is automatically cleared and the specified process starts CSTP Clear Step Instruction When the CSTPn instruction is executed the process specified by n is cleared This instruction can be used to clear the final process or to clear the processes executing in parallel during parallel branch merge control A process can be cleared from the normal ladder area or from a process that is already started...

Page 203: ... process process 2 Starts the next process process 2 Process 1 Process 2 Example 2 Selective branch control of processes This program selects and switches to the next process according to the actions and results of a particular process Each process loops until its work is completed 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE Step End WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 99 ...

Page 204: ...conditions R1 X101 R1 SSTP Y110 NSTL R2 X102 NSTL Program R2 SSTP Y111 STPE Program Process １ Starts the next process process 2 or 3 according to the condition Process ２ X101 Y110 X102 Y111 X103 R3 R3 SSTP Y112 Program Process ３ X103 Y112 Starts the process process 1 NSTL Program Process 1 Process 2 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE Step End 3 100 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 205: ... process In the program write multiple process transfer instructions for one execution condition in succession in a process To merge processes include a flag indicating the state of the other processes in the transfer condition for the next process When they merge and execute the next process clear all uncleared processes at the same time 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE St...

Page 206: ... Y112 Program Process 3 Starts the process process 1 NSTL Program R4 SSTP Y113 Program Process 4 R5 SSTP Y114 Program Process 5 R3 X103 NSTL Starts the next process process 3 R5 X104 NSTL R4 CSTP Starts the next process process 5 Clears the process process 4 R1 X110 NSTL 3 32 SSTP Start Step NSTL Next Step CSTP Clear Step STPE Step End 3 102 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 207: ... ladder area In order to clear all processes at once use the master control relay to program the code Processes need not be started in the order of their numbers You can execute multiple processes simultaneously When the output in a process that has not been started is forcibly turned ON or OFF even if the forced ON OFF operation is canceled the output state will be held until the process starts S...

Page 208: ...program due to a delay in hardware response take a counteraction on hardware to consider the delay When a process is cleared the instructions used in the process will operate as shown in the following table Type of instruction Operation OT All OFF KP Holds the state SET RST TM Reset CT Holds the current progress SR Differential instruction Refer to Operation of differential instructions between MC...

Page 209: ...r X Y R L T C P E SR IN OT DT n LD n D1 D2 Outline of operation When the ZRST instruction is executed all the running processes within the range from the process D1 and D2 will be cleared It can also be used to reset clear to zero the range from the area bit address specified in D1 to the area bit address specified in D2 Precautions for programming Be sure that D1 is smaller than D2 This instructi...

Page 210: ...Process 2 Y108 NSTL Process 8 X10F Y108 ZRST Y101 Stops all processes from the process 1 Y101 to process 8 Y108 X10F Process 1 Y101 X101 Process 2 Y102 Process 8 Y108 Stop Starts the process 1 Y101 Starts the process 2 Y102 Starts the process 8 Y108 Start Start Start 3 33 ZRST Clear Multiple Processes 3 106 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 211: ...FF type local subroutine call ECALL subroutine call with PB number specification EFCALL forced output OFF type subroutine call with PB number specification Local subroutine call instructions CALL FCALL start subroutine programs within the same PB Subroutine call instructions ECALL EFCALL start subroutine programs for a specified PB number Flow of the program process When the execution condition is...

Page 212: ...X100 CALL n ED SBL n RET Subroutine program n When CALL n is executed to are executed in order 3 34 Common Information for Subroutine Instructions 3 108 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 213: ...ll instruction is executed to start the subroutine program beginning with the SBL instruction with the specified number Precautions for programming Subroutine program n represents the program code between the SBL n instruction and the RET instruction Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction In the SBL instruction specify the values of n sequentially from 0 Subroutines can...

Page 214: ...L 1 CALL 2 RET Level 2 SBL 2 CALL 3 RET Level 3 SBL 3 CALL 4 RET Level 4 SBL 4 RET Level 5 Call from within subroutine Example of 5 levels of nesting 3 35 SBL Subroutine Label RET Subroutine Return 3 110 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 215: ...n program and continue with processing of the main program Operation when execution condition of CALL FCALL instruction is OFF When the execution condition turns OFF the operation of the current subroutine stops It is also true for calls from the master control or step ladder In this case the operation of each instruction used in the subroutine is as follows Type of instruction CALL FCALL OT Holds...

Page 216: ...input for LRSR left and right shift register instruction 6 Differential execution type high level instruction instruction specified by p and instruction name Precautions for programming The CALL FCALL instruction can be written in another subroutine program or step ladder in addition to the main program The CALL FCALL instruction with the same number can be written repeatedly Note that if a subrou...

Page 217: ...he address next to the ECALL instruction in the main program and continue with processing of the main program The local device of the called PBm is used as the local device in the called subroutine Operation Example PB PB1 program PB2 program Description Program example Instructions between SBL and RET are called and executed when the ECALL instruction is executed When RET is executed program retu...

Page 218: ... up down counter instruction 4 Shift input for SR shift register instruction 5 Shift input for LRSR left and right shift register instruction 6 Differential execution type high level instruction instruction specified by p and instruction name Precautions for programming The ECALL instruction can be written in another subroutine program or step ladder in addition to the main program The ECALL instr...

Page 219: ...ion is ON the SBLn subroutine of PBm is called When the subroutine program is processed up to the RET instruction the program will return to the address next to the EFCALL instruction in the main program and continue with processing of the main program The local device of the called PBm is used as the local device in the called subroutine Operation Example PB PB1 program PB2 program Description Pr...

Page 220: ...ded in differential instructions 1 DF leading edge differential instruction 2 Count input for CT counter instruction 3 Count input for UDC up down counter instruction 4 Shift input for SR shift register instruction 5 Shift input for LRSR left and right shift register instruction 6 Differential execution type high level instruction instruction specified by p and instruction name Precautions for pro...

Page 221: ...terruption program is executed or the unit interruption clear instruction ICLR instruction is executed Interrupt program INTPG10 IRET ED Main program area Sub program area Specification of interruption program number n Interruption program number n is specified in decimal by the combination of a slot number 1 to 16 and a bit number 0 to 7 The allocation of the last one digit varies depending on un...

Page 222: ... numbers 0 to 7 The numbers in the above table are for the slot 1 Example The interruption program number corresponding to the CH1 comparison match 1 flag of the slot number 10 is INTPG103 Interrupt program execution Executes the interruption program of a corresponding number when interruption occurs Main program process INT program process INT input When interruption is disabled the interruption ...

Page 223: ... of interruption program a higher priority program will be searched again and the corresponding interruption program will be executed The interruption activation request signal on the unit side will be held until the corresponding interruption program is executed or the unit interruption clear instruction ICLR instruction is executed Main program process INT11 program process INT12 program process...

Page 224: ...y will be executed in order after the completion of other interruption programs Main program process INT11 program process INT12 program process INT11 input INT12 input Waiting for execution If placed in execution wait state there is a time difference between the occurrence of the interrupt and execution of the interrupt program In such a case the interruption program in the waiting state can be c...

Page 225: ...ruption occurs is not installed in a specified slot number the no target unit error 10 is displayed and the mode cannot be switched to RUN Branching from the interruption program area between INTPG and IRET to other subprogram areas or main program area is not possible A subroutine program cannot be used in an interrupt program An interrupt program cannot be used in a subroutine program It is oper...

Page 226: ...nit a unit s interruption detection function can be controlled using the IMASK instruction EI This instruction enables all permitted interruptions Restarts a fixed cycle execution type PB Starts the execution of the PB after the elapse of the interval specified after the startup Also accepts the interruption permitted in the unit in which interruption occurs As interruption for the unit in which i...

Page 227: ...s that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction sets to enable or disable the interruption of the unit installed in the slot specified by D according to the data specified by S Specification of S bit no 15 0 INTPG...

Page 228: ...s not installed in the specified slot an operation error occurs When there is no definition of the interruption program INTPG corresponding to an enabled bit the bit is not enabled Zero is written Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER ON in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 3 41 IMASK Unit Interruption Disable Enable Setting 3 124 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 229: ...ces that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction clears the interruption of the unit installed in the slot specified by D according to the data specified by S Specification of S bit no 15 0 INTPG 7 INTPG 0 1 1 1 ...

Page 230: ...ed slot an operation error occurs The suspension of the interruption of a bit on which the interruption is disabled is also cleared Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER ON in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 3 42 ICLR Unit Interruption Clear 3 126 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 231: ... tool software FPWIN GR7 for Creating new program block PB or Changing PB attribute The default is start At the time of rewriting during RUN holds the PB start mode and does not reset it to the default setting A PB that is in the waiting state after startup clears the output in a single scan with the program block active relay OFF in order to change the state of each input and output relay to the ...

Page 232: ...te 2 SR1000 to SR1499 Program block active relay OFF ON ON OFF OFF Note 1 Indicates the state during the first scan after the active state is changed to the waiting state Note 2 SR16 and SR17 indicates the states of other PBs because the target PBs are not active Sample program Operation when the initial states are as follows PB1 Active PB2 Waiting PB3 Active PB PB1 program PB2 program PB3 program...

Page 233: ...01 SR1002 SR1003 PB2 PB2 PB2 1 2 Y 100 Y 101 Note 1 SR1001 to SR1003 Program block active relays of PB1 to PB3 Note 2 1 PB1 executes STARTPG instruction 2 PB1 executes STOPPG instruction Note 3 PB2 clears the output in the 1st scan after the state is changed to waiting Program block active relay is OFF 3 43 STARTPG PBn Execution Start STOPPG PBn Execution Stop WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 129 ...

Page 234: ...umbers are set for one PB The range of PB numbers that can be specified for instructions that use PB numbers ECALL EFCALL LCWT LC STARTPG and STOPPG is as follows PB number specification 1 to 468 Global PB number specification 1000 to 1999 A syntax error occurs when a number other than 1000 to 1999 that is out of the range of the settable global PB numbers is specified by the GPB instruction An op...

Page 235: ...Example 2 Example when not using GPB Calls the subroutine for PB1 from PB2 PB PB1 program PB2 program Program example 3 44 GPB Global PB Number Setting WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 131 ...

Page 236: ...T and ENDCOM instructions Input method On the program edit screen select the network you want to comment out right click on it and select Target Detarget This Network For Conversion from the menu displayed This instruction cannot be directly input Operation Example 3 45 COMOUT Comment Out ENDCOM Comment Out End 3 132 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 237: ...d when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 6 Can be spe...

Page 238: ...m operation of ST in the ladder diagram Compares the value of data register DT0 with K70 If DT0 K70 external output Y130 turns ON 70 DT0 40 10 Y130 ON OFF Precautions for use The ST ST ST ST ST and ST instructions are initiated from the bus bar Since BCD data is assumed to be a negative value during comparison if the most significant bit is 1 the comparison result may become incorrect In such a ca...

Page 239: ...Name Description SR8 ER 3 46 ST ST ST ST ST ST Data Comparison Start WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 135 ...

Page 240: ...fied when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 6 Can be ...

Page 241: ...ts Operation Example Program operation of AN in the ladder diagram When external output X100 turns ON the value of DT0 and K70 are compared and if DT0 is greater than K70 the external output Y130 turns ON 70 DT0 40 10 X100 Y130 ON OFF ON OFF Precautions for use The AN AN AN AN AN and AN instructions can be used in series Since BCD data is assumed to be a negative value during comparison if the mos...

Page 242: ... Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER ON if the specified address using the index modification exceeds a limit 3 47 AN AN AN AN AN AN Data Comparison AND 3 138 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 243: ...S C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed in...

Page 244: ...lationship between S1 and S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 Comparison instruction OR OFF ON OFF OR ON OFF ON OR OFF OFF ON OR OFF ON ON OR ON OFF OFF OR ON ON OFF Note 1 represents represents represents Operation Example Program operation of OR in the ladder diagram When external output X100 turns ON or the result of comparison between the value of DT0 and K70 is DT0 K70 external output Y130 turns ON 70 DT0 4...

Page 245: ...mparison result may become incorrect In such a case use the BIN instruction to convert the data into binary before comparison Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER ON if the specified address using the index modification exceeds a limit 3 48 OR OR OR OR OR OR Data Comparison OR WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 3 141 ...

Page 246: ... MEMO 3 142 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 247: ...4 High level Instructions Data Comparison Applicable Models All Models 4 1 CMP Data Compare 4 2 4 2 WIN Band Compare 4 6 4 3 BCMP Block Comparison 4 9 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 4 1 ...

Page 248: ...ecified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 6 Can ...

Page 249: ...tionship between S1 and S2 Comparison flags SR system relays SRA SRB SRC OFF OFF S1 S2 OFF ON S1 S2 ON OFF Example 1 Operation unit Unsigned 16 bits US SRC ON S1 DT0 S2 DT1 DT0 DT1 i US Flag operations during execution SRA SRB SRC DT0 DT1 OFF OFF ON Hexadecimal Unsigned decimal Signed decimal H 8500 K 34048 K 31488 H 6000 K 24576 K 24576 Example 2 Operation unit Signed 16 bits SS SRA ON S1 DT0 S2 ...

Page 250: ...000 K 1610612736 K 1610612736 H 85000000 K 2231369728 K 2063597568 SRA SRB SRC I0 TS0 OFF OFF ON Example 5 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF SRA ON S1 DT0 S2 LD0 i SF Decimal real number SF 1 234E 00 SF 1 234E 00 DT0 DT1 LD0 LD1 Flag operation when executed SRA SRB SRC DT0 DT1 LD0 LD1 ON OFF OFF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of...

Page 251: ...Name Description SRA Depending on the comparison result SRB SRC 4 1 CMP Data Compare WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 4 5 ...

Page 252: ...Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned intege...

Page 253: ...omparison data is checked to determine if it is within the range between S2 lower limit and S3 upper limit The comparison result is output to the system relays SRA to SRC assessment flags for comparison flags Processing 4 2 WIN Band Compare WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 4 7 ...

Page 254: ...st error and SR8 hold error Value real number decimal SF 5 000E 02 SF 8 000E 02 SF 7 000E 02 SRA SRB SRC DT1 LD2 OFF OFF OFF SRA SRB SRC DT0 DT1 LD2 LD3 ON OFF OFF Precautions for programming In the case of a direct address and an index modification address ensure that S3 is equal to or larger than S2 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect acc...

Page 255: ... Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 S4 Outline of operation Data in the area comparison block 1 that is specified by S3 is compared with data in the area comparison block 2 that is specified by S4 If the contents of both blocks match each other the system relay SRB flag turns ON Specification of control data S1 S1...

Page 256: ...FF Example 3 Comparison between 6 bytes that start from a high byte in block 1 and 6 bytes that starts from a low byte in block 2 H 35 H 30 H 37 H 36 H 34 H 32 H 33 H 30 H 31 H 35 H 00 H 33 H 34 H 32 H 31 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 S1 H1 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 S2 U6 S3 DT0 High Low H 00 S4 DT10 High Low Block 1 Block 2 SRB ON Example 4 Comparison between 7 bytes that start from a high byte in block 1 and 7 byte...

Page 257: ...e To be set when the control data is outside the range To be set when the block length is outside the available range SRB To be set when the comparison blocks of S3 and S4 match To be reset when the comparison blocks of S3 and S4 do not match 4 3 BCMP Block Comparison WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 4 11 ...

Page 258: ... MEMO 4 12 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 259: ...sfer 5 18 5 9 RST Reset 5 22 5 10 ZRST Block Clear 5 24 5 11 BKEXT 16 bit Data Sign extended Block Transfer 5 26 5 12 BKMV16 Block Transfer 32 bit Data to 16 bit Data 5 28 5 13 XCH Data Exchange 5 30 5 14 SWAP Exchange of High Bytes and Low Bytes 5 32 5 15 BSWAP High Low Byte in n Block Exchange 5 34 5 16 LCWT Specified PB Local Device Write 5 36 5 17 LCRD Specified PB Local Device Read 5 38 5 18 ...

Page 260: ...ecified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 6 Can be specified only when t...

Page 261: ...pecified by S to the device address specified by D S D Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 When the operation unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 5 1 MV Data Transfer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 3 ...

Page 262: ...ecified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 6 Can be specified only when t...

Page 263: ...ant specified by S to the device address specified by D S D Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 When the operation unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 5 2 MV Inversion and Transfer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 5 ...

Page 264: ... ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL N...

Page 265: ...cified by i Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 When the operation unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the transfer range is outside the accessible range 5 3 MV2 2 Data Transfer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 7 ...

Page 266: ...WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL...

Page 267: ... from D all at once according to the operation unit specified by i Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 When the operation unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the transfer range is outside the accessible range 5 4 MV3 3 Data Transfer WUME FP7C...

Page 268: ...e devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction transfers data in the area specified by S1 to S2 to the a...

Page 269: ...y S2 to be greater than or equal to S1 The data are transferred by operation unit ending with the device containing S2 Example 1 Device address of S2 comes to a low word operation unit 32 bits S1 DT2 S2 DT6 D DT12 Example 2 Device address of S2 comes to a high word operation unit 32 bits S1 DT2 S2 DT7 D DT12 Flag operations Name Description SR7 To be set in the case of out of range in indirect acc...

Page 270: ...Name Description SR8 ER To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range 5 5 BKMV Block Transfer 5 12 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 271: ...D F N ote 8 S D1 D2 Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US...

Page 272: ...ress and index modification address specify the same device for D1 and D2 At the same time specify D2 to be greater than or equal to D1 The data are transferred by operation unit ending with the device containing D2 Example 1 Device address of D2 comes to a high word operation unit 32 bits S DT6 D1 DT10 D2 DT17 Example 2 Device address of D2 comes to a low word operation unit 32 bits S DT6 D1 DT10...

Page 273: ... Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D1 is larger than D2 5 6 COPY Block Copy WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 15 ...

Page 274: ... source data D Starting bit address of the data destination Available devices Available Operand Bit device Specification of bit of word device Index modifier X Y R L T C P E SR IN OT DT n LD n S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction performs bit transfer from the area bit address specified by S1 through the area bit address specified by S2 to the area specified by D 5 7 BTM Bit Block Transfe...

Page 275: ...3 2 1 0 WY1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WX0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 bit BIN Precautions for programming In the case of a direct address and index modification address specify the same device for S1 and S2 At the same time specify S2 to be greater than or equal to S1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range...

Page 276: ...s Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S S1 Note 1 n Note 1 D D1 Note 1 Note 1 To be handled as a 16 bit unsigned integer US regardless of operation unit Outline of operation This instruction transfers n digits from the S1 th digit of the area specified by S to the D1 di...

Page 277: ...F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0 bit 5 8 DGT Digit Data Transfer WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 19 ...

Page 278: ...ample 2 Shift by one digit and transfer S WX0 S1 U3 H3 X 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 bit BIN n U1 H1 D WY0 D1 U0 H0 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Example 3 Transfer multiple digits in parallel S WX0 S1 U2 H2 X 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Y 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bit ...

Page 279: ...8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Example 5 Transfer four digits S WX0 S1 U0 H0 X 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Y 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 bit BIN n U4 H4 D WY0 D1 U1 H1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the operands S1 n and or D1 are out of the specified range 5 8...

Page 280: ...er Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F D N ote 3 Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Only SD60 SD61 is permitted Outline of operation If the operation unit are 16 bits US SS or 32 bits UL SL SF the area specified by D is reset cleared to ze...

Page 281: ...1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 D DT6 i UL SL SF H 11223344 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H 12345678 In the case of SF all 32 bits are 0 sign exponent and mantissa parts are 0 resulting in 0 00e 00 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 5 9 RST Reset WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 23 ...

Page 282: ...ces Available Operand Bit device Specification of bit of word device Index modifier X Y R L T C P E SR IN OT DT n LD n D1 D2 Outline of operation This instruction clears to zero resets from the area bit address specified by D1 through the area bit address specified by D2 This can also be used for a package clearance of processes that are starting up from Process D1 to Process D2 in the step ladder...

Page 283: ...8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WY0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WY1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 bit BIN Example 2 Reset YD through Y14 D1 YD D2 Y14 Precautions for programming In the case of a direct address and index modification address specify the same device for D1 and D2 At the same time specify D2 to be greater than or equal to D1 Flag operations Name Description SR...

Page 284: ...tion starting device address Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction performs sign extension for device values in the area specified by S1 to S2 and transfers them to the device address specified by D and subse...

Page 285: ...The specified source area and destination area should not overlap each other Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when the ranges of the source area and the destination area overlap 5 11 BKEXT 16 bit...

Page 286: ... H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction transfers only one low word of data in the area specified by S1 to S2 to the area specified by D and subsequent areas all at once Processing Example 1 When specifying TS for S1 and S2 and DT for D transferring only lower one word S1 TS1 S2 TS4 D DT10 5678h 11223344h 00007788h 0000AABBh CCDDEEFFh 12345678h TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 7788h AABBh EEFFh...

Page 287: ...specify S2 to be greater than or equal to S1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range 5 12 BKMV16 Block Transfer 32 bit Data to 16 bit Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 29 ...

Page 288: ...32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F D1 D2 Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction exchanges the data of the device address specified by D1 and the device address specified by D2 accord...

Page 289: ...eration unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Precautions for programming Ensure that the ranges of the exchanged data do not overlap Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 5 13 XCH Data Exchange WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 31 ...

Page 290: ... of destination of the exchanged data Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction exchanges high bytes and low bytes of the device address specified by S and transfers the resulting data to the device address specified...

Page 291: ...S SS Example Operation unit 16 bits US SS H 0011 H 2233 H 4455 H 5544 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 D DT4 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 5 14 SWAP Exchange of High Bytes and Low Bytes WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 33 ...

Page 292: ...r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction exchanges the high byte and low byte for n words from the device address specified by S and transfers it to the area starting from D The maximum number of exchanged wor...

Page 293: ...ription SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the transfer range is outside the accessible range 5 15 BSWAP High Low Byte in n Block Exchange WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 35 ...

Page 294: ... Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S n PBm D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction writes the data for n from the area specified by S to the area specified by...

Page 295: ...es Processing Example 1 When a global device is specified for S Example 2 When a local device is specified for S Instruction is executed in PB5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when an out of range value is specified for parameters To be set when the device address specified by S n exceeds the upper limit of the device To be set when PBm exceeds the maximum PB number To be set...

Page 296: ...an d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F PBm S n D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction reads the data for n from the area specified by PBm S local device to the area ...

Page 297: ... PB number To be set when S is specified for a global device To be set when the device address specified by PBm S n exceeds the upper limit of the device To be set when the device address specified by D n exceeds the upper limit of the device Example of processing Argument return value operation of ECALL instruction The following example shows the operation in which the LCWT instruction is used to...

Page 298: ... _DT100 LCWT US _DT0 _WX2 U1 _DT100 LCWT US _WX0 ECALL 1 _DT100 _DT100 _DT2 U1 LCRD US _DT12 SBL 1 _X0 ADD US _DT0 _DT1 _DT2 SUB US _DT0 _DT1 _DT2 SBL argument 1 SBL argument 2 SBL return value SBL argument 1 SBL argument 2 SBL return value PB No SBL return value Return value PB No Flag PB No SBL flag Argument 1 PB No SBL argument 1 PB No Flag Argument 2 Argument 1 5 17 LCRD Specified PB Local Dev...

Page 299: ...4 collectively PB1 Sets initial values to be preset R0 DF MV US U0 DT0 MV US U1 DT1 MV US U2 DT2 MV US U3 DT3 Presets local devices of specified PBs Specified PBs are PB2 to 4 R1 DF DT0 U4 U2 LCWT US _DT0 DT0 U4 U3 LCWT US _DT0 Local DT Data amount 4 Local DT Initial value 3 Initial value 2 Initial value 1 Initial value 0 DT0 U4 U4 LCWT US _DT0 Local DT PB2 PB3 PB4 Data amount 4 Data amount 4 5 17...

Page 300: ...WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D Outline of operation This instruction backs up 15 data 30 words of the index register value starting with D I0 to IE D to D 29 The index register value to be saved does not change The PUSHIX instruction is used to back up the index register content before switching from the main program to the subprogram in the case where index registers are used in subroutin...

Page 301: ...12345678 H 90ABCDEF I0 I1 I2 IC ID IE DT0 DT2 DT4 DT24 DT26 DT28 Backup Before backup After backup Example Specify DT0 for the 1st operand D Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the backup destination range is out of the accessible range 5 18 PUSHIX Index Register Backup WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 43 ...

Page 302: ... O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation This instruction recovers 15 data 30 words for the index register value starting with S S to S 29 I0 to IE The POPIX instruction is used to recover the content that has been backed up using the PUSHIX Index Register Backup instruction before switching from the subprogram to the main program in the case where index registers are used in subrou...

Page 303: ...345678 H 90ABCDEF DT0 DT2 DT4 DT24 DT26 DT28 Recovery Before recovery After recovery Example Specify DT0 for the 1st operand S I0 I1 I2 IC ID IE Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the recovery source range is out of the accessible range 5 19 POPIX Index Register Recovery WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 5 45 ...

Page 304: ... MEMO 5 46 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 305: ...P2 Division FP2 Compatible 6 15 6 8 INC Increment 6 18 6 9 DEC Decrement 6 20 6 10 BCDADD BCD Data Addition 6 22 6 11 BCDSUB BCD Data Subtraction 6 24 6 12 BCDMUL BCD Data Multiplication 6 26 6 13 BCDDIV BCD Data Division 6 28 6 14 BCDINC BCD Data Increment 6 30 6 15 BCDDEC BCD Data Decrement 6 32 6 16 AND Logical Conjunction 6 34 6 17 OR Logical Disjunction 6 36 6 18 XOR Exclusive OR 6 38 6 19 XN...

Page 306: ... 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer...

Page 307: ...D S1 S2 D Processing Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 or S2 and the operation unit is a real number SF 6 1 ADD Addition WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 3 ...

Page 308: ... 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer...

Page 309: ... D S1 S2 D Processing Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 or S2 and the operation unit is a real number SF 6 2 SUB Subtraction WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 5 ...

Page 310: ... 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer...

Page 311: ...t Calculation target data Calculation result US SS 16 bit 16 bit 32 bit Stored in a two word area that starts with D UL SL 32 bit 32 bit 64 bit Stored in a four word area that starts with D SF 32 bit 32 bit 32 bit Stored in a two word area that starts with D DF 64 bit 64 bit 64 bit Stored in a four word area that starts with D Processing Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US SS Example 2 Operation u...

Page 312: ...the size of the operation unit Allocate the memory area so that other areas will not be overwritten Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 or S2 and the operation unit is a real number SF 6 3 MUL Multiplication 6 8 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 313: ...WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction multiplies the values S1 and S2...

Page 314: ...Operation unit 32 bits UL SL SF Example 3 When the operation unit is unsigned 16 bit US and exceeds the maximum value Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY To be set when the result is corrected and cleared when it is not corrected 6 4 MLCLIP Saturation Multiplication 6 10 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 315: ...7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer ...

Page 316: ... DIVMOD instruction Processing Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL SF Example 3 Operation unit 64 bits DF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 or S2 and the operation unit is a real number SF To be set when 0 is specified ...

Page 317: ... IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction divides the value S1 with S2 according to the opera...

Page 318: ...ns Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 or S2 and the operation unit is a real number SF To be set when 0 is specified for S2 6 6 DIVMOD Division With a remainder 6 14 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 319: ... N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the...

Page 320: ...e the calculation target data 1 by the target data 2 and set the calculation result data and remainder Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US SS S1 DT2 S2 DT1 D DT3 Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL S1 DT6 S2 DT2 D DT20 Precautions for programming When a division overflow occurs the data is output as follows In the case of the minimum negative number 1 Operation unit SS S1 32768 H8000 S2 1 HFFFF...

Page 321: ...Name Description ER 6 7 DIVFP2 Division FP2 Compatible WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 17 ...

Page 322: ...device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction adds 1 to the value of D by the operation unit i The calculation result is stored in the address starting with D ...

Page 323: ...ration unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for D and the operation unit is a real number SF 6 8 INC Increment WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 19 ...

Page 324: ...ice Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction subtracts 1 from the value of D by the operation unit i The calculation result is stored in the address starting wit...

Page 325: ...ration unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for D and the operation unit is a real number SF 6 9 DEC Decrement WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 21 ...

Page 326: ...ice 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index...

Page 327: ...e 3 Operation unit 16 bits US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data S1 or S2 6 10 BCDADD BCD Data Addition WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 23 ...

Page 328: ... 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index re...

Page 329: ...3 Operation unit 16 bits US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data S1 or S2 6 11 BCDSUB BCD Data Subtraction WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 25 ...

Page 330: ...in g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instr...

Page 331: ...D the memory for the subsequent device may be overwritten by an area twice the size of the operation unit Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data S1 or S2 6 12 BCDMUL BCD Data Multiplication WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 27 ...

Page 332: ...ger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of...

Page 333: ...erations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when 0 is specified for S2 To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data S1 or S2 6 13 BCDDIV BCD Data Division WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 29 ...

Page 334: ... W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction adds 1 to the BCD data of D by the ope...

Page 335: ...mple 3 Operation unit 16 bits US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data D 6 14 BCDINC BCD Data Increment WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 31 ...

Page 336: ...L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified Integer constants real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction subtracts 1 from the BCD data of D by the...

Page 337: ...mple 3 Operation unit 16 bits US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when data other than BCD are specified for the calculation target data D 6 15 BCDDEC BCD Data Decrement WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 33 ...

Page 338: ...dex modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operatio...

Page 339: ... 1 1 1 Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 6 16 AND Logical Conjunction WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 35 ...

Page 340: ...dex modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operatio...

Page 341: ... 1 1 1 Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 6 17 OR Logical Disjunction WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 37 ...

Page 342: ...ndex modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operati...

Page 343: ... 0 Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 6 18 XOR Exclusive OR WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 39 ...

Page 344: ...dex modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operatio...

Page 345: ...1 1 Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 6 19 XNR Exclusive NOR WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 41 ...

Page 346: ...vice Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation uni...

Page 347: ...tarts from S1 When it is OFF the combination starts from S2 S1 S3 S2 S3 D Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 6 20 COMB Combination WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 6 43 ...

Page 348: ... MEMO 6 44 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 349: ...BCD BIN 7 12 7 7 DECO Decoding 7 14 7 8 SEGT 7 Segment Decoding 7 17 7 9 ENCO Encoding 7 20 7 10 UNIT Digit Unification 7 23 7 11 DIST Digit Disintegration 7 25 7 12 BUNI Byte Data Unification 7 27 7 13 BDIS Byte Data Disintegration 7 29 7 14 GRY Conversion Binary Gray Code 7 31 7 15 GBIN Conversion Gray Code BIN 7 34 7 16 COLM Conversion Bit Line Bit Column 7 36 7 17 LINE Conversion Bit Column Bi...

Page 350: ...Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction logi...

Page 351: ...unit 16 bits US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 7 1 INV Data Inversion WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 3 ...

Page 352: ... Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction calculates two s complement for t...

Page 353: ...2 bits SL Precautions for programming The result should be the minimum negative value if it has been specified Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 7 2 NEG Sign Inversion WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 5 ...

Page 354: ...K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the ...

Page 355: ...ns for programming The same value for unsigned integers US UL is stored Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the minimum negative value is specified for S 7 3 ABS Absolute Value WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 7 ...

Page 356: ...te 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the opera...

Page 357: ...SS S DT0 DT0 DT1 DT0 DT1 D DT0 H 0000FFFFE H FFFE Example 2 Operation unit Unsigned 16 bits US S DT0 DT0 DT1 DT0 DT1 D DT0 i SS i US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 7 4 EXT Sign Extension WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 9 ...

Page 358: ...ess to store the conversion result Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction converts the device address value or the constant specified by S from binary data to BCD data and stores the result in the device specified...

Page 359: ...0 DT11 K 12345678 DT2 H 5678 H 1234 DT12 S DT0 D DT10 S DT0 D DT10 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the binary data exceed the BCD convertible range Example When US exceeds K 9999 or UL exceeds K 99999999 7 5 BCD Conversion BCD Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 11 ...

Page 360: ... store the conversion result Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction converts the device address value or the constant specified by S from BCD data to binary data and stores the result in the device address specifi...

Page 361: ...2 Operation unit 32 bits UL DT10 DT11 DT0 DT1 K 12345678 DT12 H 614E H 00BC DT2 i UL S DT0 D DT10 S DT0 D DT10 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S is not BCD data 7 6 BIN Conversion BCD BIN WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 13 ...

Page 362: ...e r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction decodes a value of the device address or the constant specified by S and stores the result in the device address spe...

Page 363: ...000 0100 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 1000 1011 0000 1000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0001 0000 1100 0001 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0010 0000 1101 0010 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0100 0000 1110 0100 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 1000 0000 1111 1000 0000 0000 0000 Specification of nL and length of operation result Value of nL Effective bit length for conversion Occupancy length of the decoded ...

Page 364: ...r bits become 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the conversion enabled bit length nL is not in the following range 1 nL 8 To be set when the sum of the conversion starting bit number nH and the conversion enabled bit length nL is not in the following range 1 nH nL 16 To be set if when the decoded...

Page 365: ... Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction converts the device address value or a constant specified by S to 7 segment data in 4 digits and stores it to an address of 2 words beginning with...

Page 366: ... 1 0 1 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 5 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 7 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 A 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 B 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 D 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 E 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 F 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 To be set in...

Page 367: ...Name Description ER To be set if when the conversion result is stored in the device address specified by D it exceeds the area 7 8 SEGT 7 Segment Decoding WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 19 ...

Page 368: ... and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction encodes a part of a device address value or a constant specified by S and stores the result to the device address specified by D The target section to be encoded is specified by the control data n If multiple bits are ON in the target section for encoding t...

Page 369: ...0010 0001 0000 0010 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 0100 0010 0000 0100 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 0000 1000 0011 0000 1000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0001 0000 0100 0001 0000 0000 0000 1100 0000 0000 0010 0000 0101 0010 0000 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0100 0000 0110 0100 0000 0000 0000 1110 0000 0000 1000 0000 0111 1000 0000 0000 0000 1111 Specification of nL and length of result Value of nL Effective bi...

Page 370: ...ansfer starts with the 0th digit 1st digit 2nd digit and 3rd digit by every four bits from the lower level Precautions for programming If an unsigned constant U is specified for S it should be converted as Hex data Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the conversion enabled bit length nL is not in the...

Page 371: ...e operation unit Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified 32 bit devices real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation The lower 4 bits of...

Page 372: ...001 0000 0000 Padded with 0 DT20 S DT10 n U3 D DT20 11 8 7 4 3 0 i US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n the number of data to be unified is out of the specified range 7 10 UNIT Digit Unification 7 24 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 373: ...ce address data format unsigned 16 bit integer Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified 32 bit devices real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of...

Page 374: ...1 0000 DT10 i US Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n the number into which the data is broken down is out of the specified range To be set when if data equivalent to n is transferred from the address specified by D it exceeds the device address 7 11 DIST Digit Disintegration 7 26 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 375: ...x modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified 32 bit devices real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation The target of this instruction is data of n words that begins with S The lower 1 byte of each wo...

Page 376: ...00 00000000 DT10 DT11 7 0 31 24 00000000 23 16 DT21 Example 2 S DT10 n U3 D DT20 00000000 DT12 00010001 15 8 7 0 DT20 Padded with 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n the number of data to be unified is out of the specified range 7 12 BUNI Byte Data Unification 7 28 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 377: ...fie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified 32 bit devices real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation The target of this instruction is data of n words that begins with S Each word data is broken down int...

Page 378: ...011 15 8 7 0 DT10 DT20 S DT10 n U2 D DT20 S DT10 n U4 D DT20 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n the number into which the data is broken down is out of the specified range To be set when if data equivalent to n is transferred from the address specified by D it exceeds the device address 7 13 BDIS ...

Page 379: ...eger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified 32 bit devices real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of opera...

Page 380: ... 2 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 3 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0010 4 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0110 5 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0111 6 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0101 7 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 0100 8 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 1100 9 0000 0000 0000 1001 0000 0000 0000 1101 10 0000 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 0000 1111 11 0000 0000 0000 10...

Page 381: ...0001 0100 25 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0001 0101 26 0000 0000 0001 1010 0000 0000 0001 0111 27 0000 0000 0001 1011 0000 0000 0001 0110 28 0000 0000 0001 1100 0000 0000 0001 0010 29 0000 0000 0001 1101 0000 0000 0001 0011 30 0000 0000 0001 1110 0000 0000 0001 0001 31 0000 0000 0001 1111 0000 0000 0001 0000 32 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 63 0000 0000 0010 1111 0000 0000 0010 0000 64 ...

Page 382: ...er Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruc...

Page 383: ...n unit 16 bits US Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 7 15 GBIN Conversion Gray Code BIN WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 35 ...

Page 384: ...vailable devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation 16 bit data rows specified by S are transferr...

Page 385: ... in indirect access index modification To be set when the specification for the bit position n is not in the following range 0 n 15 To be set if when the conversion result is stored in the device address specified by D it exceeds the area 7 16 COLM Conversion Bit Line Bit Column WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 37 ...

Page 386: ...devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation The n bit column data in the 16 word device area specified by...

Page 387: ...range in indirect access index modification To be set when the specification for the bit position n is not in the following range 0 n 15 To be set when the conversion range specified by S exceeds the device address 7 17 LINE Conversion Bit Column Bit Line WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 7 39 ...

Page 388: ... MEMO 7 40 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 389: ...ock Area for n Digits 8 18 8 10 WBSL Left Shift of Block Area for n Digits 8 20 8 11 ROR Right Rotation of Data 8 22 8 12 ROL Left Rotation of Data 8 24 8 13 RCR Right Rotation of Data with Carry Flag Data 8 26 8 14 RCL Left Rotation of Data with Carry Flag Data 8 28 8 15 CMPR Data Table Shift Out and Compress 8 30 8 16 CMPW Data Table Shift In and Compress 8 32 8 17 DEFBUF Buffer Definition 8 34 ...

Page 390: ...S US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction shifts the data specifie...

Page 391: ... Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY To be reset if the n no of shift bits is larger than the operation unit In other cases data in the n th bit from the least significant bit are to be set 8 1 SHR Right Shift for n Bits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 3 ...

Page 392: ...US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is an unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction shifts the data specifi...

Page 393: ...8 0110 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY To be reset if the n no of shift bits is larger than the operation unit In other cases data in the n th bit from the most significant bit are to be set 8 2 SHL Left Shift for n Bits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 5 ...

Page 394: ...be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outlin...

Page 395: ... 8 digits Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 When the operation unit is 32 bit UL SL SF Precautions for programming The digit data that have been shifted out are cleared Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 8 3 BSR Right Shift for n Digits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 7 ...

Page 396: ...be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 5 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outlin...

Page 397: ...een 1 to 8 digits Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Precautions for programming The digit data that have been shifted out are cleared Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 8 4 BSL Left Shift for n Digits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 9 ...

Page 398: ...e Specification of bit of word device Index modifier X Y R L T C P E S R IN O T DT n LD n D1 D2 Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constan...

Page 399: ...inserted for the number of shifted bits Excluded Precautions for programming In the case of a direct address and index modification address specify the same device for D1 and D2 At the same time specify D2 to be greater than or equal to D1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D1 is larger than D2 To b...

Page 400: ...evice Specification of bit of word device Index modifier X Y R L T C P E S R IN O T DT n LD n D1 D2 Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants ...

Page 401: ...inserted for the number of shifted bits Excluded Precautions for programming In the case of a direct address and index modification address specify the same device for D1 and D2 At the same time specify D2 to be greater than or equal to D1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D1 is larger than D2 To b...

Page 402: ...6 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Outline of operation This instruction shifts the area from the address specified by D1 to the address specified by D2 to the right b...

Page 403: ...3 DT2 DT1 DT0 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS D1 DT1 D2 DT7 n K2 DT9 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT0 5678 1234 EEFF CCDD AABB 8899 6677 4455 2233 0011 The shifted bits are padded with H 0000 HEX 5678 1234 0000 0000 EEFF CCDD AABB 8899 6677 0011 HEX DT9 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT0 i US i SS Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect...

Page 404: ...16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Outline of operation This instruction shifts the area from the address specified by D1 to the address specified by D2 to the left b...

Page 405: ...3 DT2 DT1 DT0 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS D1 DT1 D2 DT6 n K2 DT9 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT0 5678 1234 EEFF CCDD AABB 8899 6677 4455 2233 0011 The shifted bits are padded with H 0000 HEX 5678 1234 EEFF 8899 6677 4455 2233 0000 0000 0011 HEX DT9 DT8 DT7 DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DT0 i US i SS Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect...

Page 406: ... bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Outline of operation This instruction shifts the area from the address specified by D1 to the address specified by D2 to the right by...

Page 407: ...re padded with H0 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS The shifted digits are padded with H0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D1 is larger than D2 To be set when n specified number of shift digits is out of the available range 8 9 WBSR Right Shift of Block Area for n Digits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 19 ...

Page 408: ...6 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Outline of operation This instruction shifts the area from the address specified by D1 to the address specified by D2 to the left by...

Page 409: ...re padded with H0 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS The shifted digits are padded with H0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D1 is larger than D2 To be set when n specified number of shift digits is out of the available range 8 10 WBSL Left Shift of Block Area for n Digits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 21 ...

Page 410: ... 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction rotates the data specified by D to the right to the low bit position by the number of bits specified by n decimal specification Only the lower 8 bits in data are available for n The rotation amount is specified between 0...

Page 411: ...e Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY Rotation amount 1 bits of the pre operation data are output When the operation unit is 16 bits US if n is either 0 or a multiple of 16 the rotation amount is regarded as 0 and no change occurs When the operation unit is 32 bits UL if n is either 0 or a multiple of 32 the rotation amount is r...

Page 412: ...devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction rotates the data specified by D to the left to the high bit position by the number of bits specified by n decimal specification Only the lower 8 bits in data are available for n The rotation amount is specified between 0 and 255 bits B...

Page 413: ...R7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY Bit length of the operation unit rotation amount bits of the pre operation data are output When the operation unit is 16 bits US if n is either 0 or a multiple of 16 the rotation amount is regarded as 0 and no change occurs When the operation unit is 32 bits UL if n is either 0 or a multiple of 32 the rota...

Page 414: ...y 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction rotates the data specified by D to the right to the low bit position by the number of bits specified by n decimal specification with SR9 CY Only the lower 8 bits in data are available for n The rotation amount is specified bet...

Page 415: ...on SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY Rotation amount 1 bits of the pre operation data are output When the operation unit is 16 bits US if n is either 0 or a multiple of 17 the rotation amount is regarded as 0 and no change occurs When the operation unit is 32 bits UL if n is either 0 or a multiple of 33 the rotation amount is regarded as ...

Page 416: ...s 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction rotates the data specified by D to the left to the high bit position by the number of bits specified by n decimal specification with SR9 CY Only the lower 8 bits in data are available for n The rotation amount is specified between 0 and 255 ...

Page 417: ...o be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY Bit length of the operation unit rotation amount bits of the pre operation data are output When the operation unit is 16 bits US if n is either 0 or a multiple of 17 the rotation amount is regarded as 0 and no change occurs When the operation unit is 32 bits UL if n is either 0 or a multiple of 33 the rotation amount...

Page 418: ... g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 1 K Ｕ H SF D F D1 D2 D3 Note 1 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation According to the operation unit i the instruction transfers D2 to D3 and compresses the areas specified by D1 to D2 Except the data transferred to D3 at the time of compression The data in the specified area excluding 0 are allocated in de...

Page 419: ...DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 H 8 DT10 DT8 H 9 DT8 D1 DT1 D2 DT7 D3 DT10 First execution Compression Read data move H 9 H 0 H 0 H 0 H 3 H 0 H 0 H 3 H 7 H 0 H 0 H 1 H 5 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 H 0 H 0 H 1 H 5 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 H 7 DT10 DT8 H 9 DT8 Second execution Compression Read data move i US SS Precautions during programming In the case of a direct address and index modification...

Page 420: ...Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S D1 D2 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is an unsigned integer US Outline of operation According to the operation unit of n the instruction transfers S to D1 and compresses the areas specifi...

Page 421: ...ce 0 0 3 7 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 9 DT10 DT8 9 DT8 S DT10 D1 DT0 D2 DT7 First execution Compression Write data move 9 0 0 9 5 0 0 3 7 0 0 9 5 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 0 16 3 7 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 9 DT8 Second execution Compression Write data move 16 DT10 i US SS Precautions during programming In the case of a direct address and index modification address specify the...

Page 422: ... 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation According to the operat...

Page 423: ... S 1 S 2 S 3 Processing 1 n buffer size is specified in D buffer start 2 The range from D 1 stored data amount to D 3 writing pointer is cleared to zero K 8 K 128 K 0 K 4 K 6 K 1 K 3 K 5 K 7 K 0 K 2 K 4 K 6 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 K 0 K 0 K 5 K 7 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 K 8 DT8 Buffer size Stored data amount Writing pointer Reading pointer n K 128 U 128 D DT0 Example Operation ...

Page 424: ...Name Description To be set when the range D buffer start n buffer size is out of the available range 8 17 DEFBUF Buffer Definition 8 36 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 425: ... D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction reads data from FIFO buffer specified by S and sets it to D In the S buffer area it is necessary to define buffer first using the DEFBUF instruction Pre execution buffer consistency check An operation error occurs in the following cases 1 S buffer size 4096...

Page 426: ... K 1 H 101 H 103 K 4 K 4 H 102 H 104 K 5 K 0 H 101 H 103 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 Example Operation unit 16 bits US SS K 3 K 4 H 102 H 104 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 H 20 DT20 DT8 H 105 DT8 S DT0 D DT20 S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 H 101 DT20 S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 Because S 2 reading pointer points at 0 transfer 0th data in the buffer to D Decrement 1 Increment 1 Buffe...

Page 427: ... amount is larger than S buffer size To be set when S 2 read pointer is greater than or equal to S buffer size To be set when the buffer area exceeds the upper limit of a specified device 8 18 FIFR Data Read First In First Out WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 8 39 ...

Page 428: ...r constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction sets the data specified by S to the buffer specified by D In the D buffer area it is necessary to define buffer first using the DEFBUF instruction ...

Page 429: ...e 16 bits US SS 4 4 102 201 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 201 DT20 DT8 105 DT8 S DT20 D DT0 D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 Buffer size Stored data amount Reading pointer 0th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 201 DT20 D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 Increment 1 Increment 1 Writing pointer Buffer size Stored data amount Reading pointer 0th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Writing pointer Because D 3 writing pointer points at 3...

Page 430: ... S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction reads data from LIFO buffer specified by S and sets it to D In the S buffer area it is necessary to define buffer first using the DEFBUF instruction Pre execution buffer consistency check An operation error occurs in the following cases 1 S buffer size 4096 or ...

Page 431: ...0 H 101 H 103 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 Example 16 bits US SS K 3 K 3 H 102 H 104 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 H 10 DT20 DT8 H 105 DT8 S DT0 D DT20 S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 H 104 DT20 S S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 S 5 S 6 S 7 S 8 Because S 3 LIFO pointer points at 3 transfer 3rd data in the buffer to D Decrement 1 Decrement 1 Buffer size Stored data amount LIFO pointer 0th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Bu...

Page 432: ...ion To be set when S 3 LIFO pointer is greater than or equal to S buffer size To be set when the buffer area exceeds the upper limit of a specified device 8 20 LIFR Data Read Last In First Out 8 44 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 433: ...r of stored data reaches the buffer size the next data is written from the beginning of the ring buffer and the previous values are overwritten Structure of ring buffer Name Data type Description D Buffer size Unsigned 16 bit integer The size of the ring buffer area is stored when the DEFRBUF instruction is executed D 1 Number of stored data Unsigned 16 bit integer The amount of data that is store...

Page 434: ... DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 U 4 K 0 SF 0 0 U 0 K 5 K 6 K 7 K 8 Buffer size Stored data amount Total Average Write pointer U 0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT0 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 Precautions for programming When this instruction is executed data in the ring buffer area is not cleared Use a data transfer instruction or other instructions to reset the area if necessary Do not use other instructions than t...

Page 435: ...fied only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Outline of operation This instruction writes data to the buffer data area of the ring buffer that is defined by the DEFRBUF instruction and calculates the total value and the moving average value This instruction writes the data specified by S to the buffer data area of the ring buffer that starts from D This instruction stores the total val...

Page 436: ...ge value Write pointer 0th First Second Third Fourth DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 DT11 D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 Example 2 When data is written five times by the RBUFW instruction with the buffer size of 5 D DT0 U 5 K 206 SF 5 15E 01 S DT20 K 67 K 54 K 52 K 33 U 4 U 4 K 5 U 5 K 261 SF 5 22E 01 K 67 K 54 K 33 K 52 U 5 U 0 K 55 K 55 DT20 S DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT...

Page 437: ...ird Fourth DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 DT11 D D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 D 8 D 9 D 10 D 11 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when D buffer size is larger than 30000 or D buffer size is 0 To be set when D 1 stored data amount is larger than D buffer size To be set when D 6 write pointer...

Page 438: ... MEMO 8 50 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 439: ...n Applicable Models All Models 9 1 BTS 16 bit Data Specified Bit Set 9 2 9 2 BTR 16 bit Data Specified Bit Reset 9 4 9 3 BTI Bit Inversion 9 6 9 4 BTT Bit Test 9 8 9 5 STC Carry Flag Set 9 10 9 6 CLC Carry Flag Reset 9 11 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 9 1 ...

Page 440: ...ote 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction turns ON 1 the n th bit in the area specified by D Other bits except the bit specified by n do not change n is in the range of U0 to ...

Page 441: ... 0 0 0 0 bit DT1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 DT1 U8 Precautions for programming The conventional models such as FP2 or FP2SH operate with only the lower four bits as valid even when the specified operand n is out of the available range For FP7 an operation error occurs when the specified value is out of the range Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range...

Page 442: ...g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction turns OFF 0 the n th bit in the area specified by D Other bits except the bit specified by n do not change n is in...

Page 443: ... 0 0 0 Bits DT1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 DT1 U5 Precautions for programming The conventional models such as FP2 or FP2SH operate with only the lower four bits as valid even when the specified operand n is out of the available range For FP7 an operation error occurs when the specified value is out of the range Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range ...

Page 444: ...ilable devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction inverts the n th bit in the area specified by D according to the o...

Page 445: ...1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DT0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Bit BIN Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n is out of the range 9 3 BTI Bit Inversion WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 9 7 ...

Page 446: ...15 Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D n Outline of operation This instruction tests the n th bit in the area specified by D ON OFF judgment according to the operation unit i and outputs the result to SRB State of specified bit SRB flag ON 1 OFF 0 OF...

Page 447: ... US SRB is ON i US D DT0 n U3 Bit BIN F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DT0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Flag operation during execution State of the specified bit SRB OFF 0 ON 1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when n is out of the range SRB To be set when the test bit Bit n is 0 To be reset when the...

Page 448: ...rry Flag Set Ladder diagram Outline of operation This instruction turns ON SR9 CY Flag operations Name Description SR9 CY To be set after this instruction is executed 9 5 STC Carry Flag Set 9 10 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 449: ...Flag Reset Ladder diagram Outline of operation This instruction turns OFF SR9 CY Flag operations Name Description SR9 CY To be reset after this instruction is executed 9 6 CLC Carry Flag Reset WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 9 11 ...

Page 450: ... MEMO 9 12 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 451: ... 10 27 10 8 STDDEV Acquiring the Variance and Standard Deviation 10 30 10 9 EVENTC Instruction to Count the Number of Events 10 33 10 10 EVENTT Instruction to Count the Time of Events 10 36 10 11 PID PID Operation 10 39 10 12 EZPID PID Operation PWM Output Available 10 45 10 13 DTR Data Revision Detection 10 55 10 14 RAMP Ramp Output 10 57 10 15 LIMT Upper and Lower Limit Control 10 59 10 16 BAND ...

Page 452: ...it device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modific ation Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and...

Page 453: ...me value in a decimal form Store the position of the first matching data relative position with the first data as 0 Description of output The maximum amount of data that can be specified is 30000 Search is executed from S2 to S3 Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS H ７FFF H 1234 H 1234 H 6677 H 1234 DT10 DT38 DT39 DT40 S1 DT10 S2 DT20 H 1211 H 12FF H 1234 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT2...

Page 454: ... The end position of the search range is the device that contains S3 H CCDDEEFF H 11223344 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H CCDDEEFF H 12345678 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 S2 DT2 S3 DT6 Example When the operation unit is specified as 32 bits the search range becomes the same whether a higher or lower address is specified for the S3 device address H 11223344 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H 12345678 S2 D...

Page 455: ...r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This function counts the number of ON bits bits...

Page 456: ... bits US Example 2 Operation units 32 bits UL specify a 16 bit device for S Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 10 2 BCU ON Bits Count 10 6 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 457: ...peran d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be spec...

Page 458: ...t 16 bits US SS 32 bits UL SL SF 64 bits DF Output content Device size 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit Result storage area D Cannot specify D to D 1 D D to D 3 D to D 1 Stores the maximum value D 1 to D 2 Cannot specify D 2 to D 3 D 1 D 4 to D 5 D 2 Position of the first detected maximum value Relative position with the start of S1 as 0 10 3 MAX Acquiring the Maximum Value 10 8 WUME FP7C...

Page 459: ...osition DT101 DT102 D D 1 D 2 U 2 Unsigned 16 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer K 0 K 32 K 5 K 33 K 21 DT100 DT18 DT19 DT20 S1 DT10 S2 DT20 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS K 10 K 12 K 32 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 0 D DT100 Output result Max value search range 1 2 3 8 9 10 Relative position DT101 DT102 D D 1 D 2 U 2 Signed 16 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer i US i SS 10 3 MAX Acquiring the Maxi...

Page 460: ...0 K 100 K 100 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 0 D TS100 Output result Max value search range 1 2 3 38 39 40 Relative position D Signed 16 bit integer U 39 TS101 D 1 Unsigned 32 bit integer U 38 TS101 i SL i UL H 12345678 H AAAA0000 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H AAAA0000 DT100 DT101 DT28 DT29 DT30 DT31 DT26 DT27 S1 DT10 S2 DT30 Example 5 Operation unit 32 bits UL specify a 16 bit device H 1234FFFF H 789A3456 H 9900A...

Page 461: ...ve position D D 1 D 2 D 3 Single precision floating point real number 32 bits Unsigned 32 bit integer U 38 DT102 DT103 i SL i SF Precautions for programming The end position of the search range for the maximum value is the device that contains S2 H CCDDEEFF H 11223344 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H CCDDEEFF H 12345678 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 S1 DT2 S2 DT6 Example When the operation unit i...

Page 462: ...R7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the S1 device and the S2 device differ 10 3 MAX Acquiring the Maximum Value 10 12 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 463: ...ran d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specif...

Page 464: ...t 16 bits US SS 32 bits UL SL SF 64 bits DF Output content Device size 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit Result storage area D Cannot specify D to D 1 D D to D 3 D to D 1 Stores the minimum value D 1 to D 2 Cannot specify D 2 to D 3 D 1 D 4 to D 5 D 2 Position of the first detected maximum value Relative position with the start of S1 as 0 10 4 MIN Acquiring the Minimum Value 10 14 WUME FP7...

Page 465: ...osition DT101 DT102 D D 1 D 2 U 1 Unsigned 16 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer K 0 K 33 K 5 K 33 K 21 DT100 DT18 DT19 DT20 S1 DT10 S2 DT20 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS K 10 K 12 K 32 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 0 D DT100 Output result Max value search range 1 2 3 8 9 10 Relative position DT101 DT102 D D 1 D 2 U 9 Signed 16 bit integer Unsigned 32 bit integer i US i SS 10 4 MIN Acquiring the Mini...

Page 466: ... 200 K 100 K 100 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 0 D TS100 Output result Max value search range 1 2 3 38 39 40 Relative position D Signed 16 bit integer U 0 TS101 D 1 Unsigned 32 bit integer U 40 TS101 i UL i SL H 12345678 H 121112 FF H 121112FF H 9900AABB H AAAA0000 DT100 DT101 DT28 DT29 DT30 DT31 DT26 DT27 S1 DT10 S2 DT30 Example 5 Operation unit 32 bits UL specify a 16 bit device H 1234FFFF H 789A3456 H 99...

Page 467: ...SF 1 11 SF 3 33 DT100 DT101 DT88 DT89 DT90 DT91 DT86 DT87 S1 DT10 S2 DT90 Example 7 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF SF 1 11 SF 3 33 SF 2 22 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT16 DT17 0 D DT100 Output result Min value search range 1 2 3 38 39 40 Relative position D D 1 D 2 D 3 Single precision floating point real number 32 bits Unsigned 32 bit integer U 0 DT102 DT103 i SF...

Page 468: ...788 H 9900AABB H 12345678 S1 DT2 S2 DT7 Min value search range Min value search range DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 Data is overwritten if D search result for minimum value is specified within the search range for the maximum value Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To...

Page 469: ... St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This ...

Page 470: ...tal value D 2 Cannot specify D 4 to D 5 D 2 D 2 to D 3 D 1 D 4 to D 7 D 2 to D 3 Mean value Processing H 5555 H 111 1 H 00028886 Value Value Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US S1 DT10 S2 DT14 D DT100 DT10 H 7777 DT11 DT12 i US DT100 DT101 Total value is given in 32 bit data and the mean value is given in 16 bit data Total mean calculation range H FFFF H AAAA DT13 DT14 Output result Total value D ...

Page 471: ...2 i SL TS100 TS101 Total value is given in 64 bit data and the mean value is given in 32 bit data Total mean calculation range K 5000 TS13 TS14 Output result Signed 64 bit integer K 1800 Value TS102 Signed 32 bit integer Mean value D 2 Total value D and D 1 Example 5 Operation unit 32 bits UL specify a 16 bit device H 77776666 H 33332222 H 1111000 0 H 11110 CCCC Value Value S1 DT10 S2 DT14 D DT100...

Page 472: ... precision floating point real number 32 bits SF 3 33E 00 Value Single precision floating point real number 32 bits Mean value D 2 D 3 DT102 DT103 Total value D and D 1 SF 5 55E 00 SF 1 11E 00 SF 2 22E 00 DT18 DT19 SF 3 33E 00 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 Precautions for programming The end position of the total and the mean calculation range is the device that contains S2 Example When the operat...

Page 473: ... ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the S1 device and the S2 device differ 10 5 MEAN Acquiring the Total and the Mean Value WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 10 23 ...

Page 474: ...Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Data in the range from the area specified by S1 to the area specified by S2 are sorted ...

Page 475: ...K 300 K 100 K 30 K 10 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 K 3 K 1 K 1 K 3 K 30 DT15 DT16 DT17 DT18 DT19 Before sort After sort H 22220000 H 1111333 3 H 55550000 H 22222222 H 1111444 4 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT16 DT17 DT18 DT19 S1 DT10 S2 DT19 Example 3 Operation unit 32 bits UL S3 U0 Ascending order Before sort After sort H 1111333 3 H 1111444 4 H 22220000 H 22222222 H 55550000 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT1...

Page 476: ...ecution data in S1 to S2 are sorted in sequence according to the sort conditions The end position of the sort range is the device that contains S2 Example When the operation unit is 32 bits the sort range is the same whether a device number of higher level or lower level is specified H CCDDEEFF H 11223344 H 55667788 H 9900AABB H CCDDEEFF H 12345678 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 S1 DT2 S2...

Page 477: ... C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed i...

Page 478: ...ata table The result is stored into the D area Output value Input value x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 xn 1 yn 1 xn yn Y D X S1 Structure of data table S2 The number for data table n setting range 2 to 256 is determined by the value n specified for the starting address of the data table S2 n is 16 bit data regardless of the operation unit Scaling data x1 to xn y1 to yn is stored from S2 1 Depending on the oper...

Page 479: ... x1 to xn y1 to yn x1 to xn y1 to yn Precautions for programming For data in the data table S2 ensure that Xn 1 is smaller than Xn When X S1 is smaller than x1 Y D equals y1 When X S1 is larger than xn Y D equals yn The maximum value for n that indicates the number of data in the data table S2 is 256 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect acce...

Page 480: ...L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ N ote 2 H N ote 3 SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is an integer US SS Outline of operation This instruction s...

Page 481: ...2 bit Single precision real number 32 bit D DT100 U 2 U 4 U 5 U 6 U 8 Calculation range Output result SF 4 00E 00 The following results are stored Variance of S to S 4 is stored in D D 1 Standard deviation of S to S 4 is stored in D 2 D 3 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS n U5 DT10 S DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 SF 2 4400E 01 Variance Standard deviation Single precision real ...

Page 482: ...SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S n exceeds the device address To be set when the result storage area exceeds the device address To be set when the specified ranges of S1 and D overlap 10 8 STDDEV Acquiring the Variance and Standard Deviation 10 32 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 483: ... 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction counts the number of ONs for n bits from the device specified by S1 During the counting operation a data area that is equal to n 1...

Page 484: ... points from WX0 i UL S1 WX0 S2 DT0 n U 8 D DT10 Targeted bits 8 bits from X0 to X7 S1 WX0 Working area for counting S2 DT0 D DT10 X0 counted value DT11 2 DT12 X1 counted value DT13 3 DT14 X2 counted value DT15 4 DT16 X3 counted value DT17 5 DT18 X4 counted value DT19 6 DT20 X5 counted value DT21 7 DT22 X6 counted value DT23 8 DT24 X7 counted value DT25 10 9 EVENTC Instruction to Count the Number ...

Page 485: ... X7 counted value DT25 WX0 WX1 Targeted bits 17 bits from X0 to X10 Working area for counting DT0 DT1 15 DT38 XE counted value DT39 16 DT40 XF counted value DT41 17 DT42 X10 counted value DT43 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification When one of the count target area the count working area or the count result storage ar...

Page 486: ... St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction counts the time of ONs for n bits from the device specified by S1 The count result is stored in the ...

Page 487: ... DT0 n U 8 D DT10 Targeted bits 8 bits from X0 to X7 S1 WX0 Working area for counting S2 DT0 D DT10 X0 counted value DT11 2 DT12 X1 counted value DT13 3 DT14 X2 counted value DT15 4 DT16 X3 counted value DT17 5 DT18 X4 counted value DT19 6 DT20 X5 counted value DT21 7 DT22 X6 counted value DT23 8 DT24 X7 counted value DT25 10 10 EVENTT Instruction to Count the Time of Events WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 10 3...

Page 488: ... X7 counted value DT25 WX0 WX1 Targeted bits 17 bits from X0 to X10 Working area for counting DT0 DT1 15 DT38 XE counted value DT39 16 DT40 XF counted value DT41 17 DT42 X10 counted value DT43 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification When one of the count target area the count working area or the count result storage ar...

Page 489: ...cients used for PID operation proportional gain integral time derivative time as well as the types and interval of operation are set to the parameter table S to S 29 Types of PID operation Items Description Reverse operation forward operation Select the upward downward direction of output in the case of change to the process Specify reverse operation if output is increased when the process value d...

Page 490: ...e first reverse operation H3 Proportional plus derivative first forward operation H8000 to H8003 When executing auto tuning H8000 Derivative first reverse operation H8001 Derivative first forward operation H8002 Proportional plus derivative first reverse operation H8003 Proportional plus derivative first forward operation S 1 Set point value SP K0 to K10000 Set the target value for the process con...

Page 491: ...ecified in the control mode automatic adjustment is carried out and the set point value is rewritten Precautions for programming Including the work area for operation a 30 word area is required for the parameter table Ensure that this area value is not rewritten by other instructions Error is not detected even if the parameter table exceeds the area When specifying S specify a number that is withi...

Page 492: ...eased or decreased in accordance with the respective set point values SPs Changes to manipulated values MVs of auto tuning are completed in three sessions upper limit output lower limit output upper limit output in the fewest times possible If the auto tuning progress does not change from 0 after multiple sessions shorten the control interval Ts and retry auto tuning Overview of PID control 1 Prop...

Page 493: ...Measurement signal PV Deviation e Differential Output mD e mD mD TD de dt The advancing property of derivative operation reduces the negative effects that the delaying property of the process has on control The larger the Td value the stronger the action of the derivative operation Pure derivative operation becomes temporarily inoperative if noise etc is input This has a negative effect on the con...

Page 494: ... to their optimal values the control quantity can be quickly matched to the target value and maintained Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a parameter is out of the setting range 10 11 PID PID Operation 10 44 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 495: ... O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 S4 Outline of operation PID operation is carried out to retain the process value PV stored in S 2 in consistency with the set point value SP specified by S3 The operation result is stored as a manipulated value MV in the area specified by S4 If an OUT instruction is described immediately after this instruction PWM output ON OFF output can be gained proport...

Page 496: ...figure the setting in the area of control data S1 Setting of parameters S1 to S3 Operand Parameter name Setting range Setting method S1 Control data Bit 0 Bit 1 0 ON Auto tuning request is issued After auto tuning is completed this is reset when the EZPID instruction is executed Reset this bit when auto tuning is canceled Bit 0 0 OFF PID operation is performed Bit 1 When auto tuning is completed c...

Page 497: ...th the settings where proportional gain Kp is 1 integral time Ti is 0 and derivative time Td is 0 Setting of parameters S4 to S4 29 Operand Parameter name Default Setting range Setting method S4 Manipulated value MV K0 K 10000 to K 10000 The result of PID operation is stored If PWM output is selected in bit 3 of S1 calculation is carried out in the range 0 to 10000 as the duty ratio 0 to 100 of PW...

Page 498: ...t to S4 7 the value given as 200 of the proportional gain Kp obtained through auto tuning is set to S3 1 S4 8 Auto tuning Integral time Ti Correction coefficient U200 200 U50 to U500 50 to 500 S4 9 Auto tuning Derivative Time Td Correction coefficient U100 100 U50 to U500 50 to 500 S4 10 Auto tuning progress status U0 U0 to U5 This indicates the progress of auto tuning Starting with the default 0 ...

Page 499: ... EZPID instruction is switched on If the S4 manipulated value MV should not be cleared set 1 to bit 2 of S1 before executing the EZPID instruction If the execution condition of the EZPID instruction is switched OFF during PID control PWM output Y180 is also turned OFF At this time the value of the manipulated value MV of operand S4 is retained Interval and duty ratio of PWM output The duty of PWM ...

Page 500: ... execution In order to use analog output set 1 to bit 3 of the operand S1 The output lower limit S4 1 and the output upper limit S4 2 should be set according to the output range of the analog output unit The value of the control interval Ts S4 4 should be modified according to the input updating interval normally 0 1 seconds or more of the analog input unit Example If the value of S4 4 is K10 Ts i...

Page 501: ...l set point value SP during PID control operation and the set point value SP during auto tuning In the case of reverse operation heating SP is equal to or larger than SP and the difference thereof is given as the bias value In the case of forward operation cooling SP is equal to or smaller than SP and the difference thereof is given as the bias value Even if auto tuning is started up with the proc...

Page 502: ...output cycle for controlling multiple objects you can delay the startup timing for example by adjusting the startup condition rise time The system does not operate correctly if two or more PID instructions specifying the same table are described in the program Even if execution conditions are not met PID instructions operate internally using the specified table In such cases set the tables to sepa...

Page 503: ...e respective set point values SPs Changes to manipulated values MVs of auto tuning are completed in three sessions upper limit output lower limit output upper limit output in the fewest times possible If the auto tuning progress does not change from 0 after multiple sessions shorten the control interval Ts and retry auto tuning Operation actions S4 through S4 29 are initialized when the execution ...

Page 504: ...l calculated value is output in the range from 0 to 10000 converted by the following formula and set to the operand S4 as the manipulated value MV Conversion formula Upper limit Lower limit x Internal calculated value 10000 Lower limit Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the following parameters are out of the setting range S2 process value PV S3 set point value SP S3 1 KP S...

Page 505: ...nteger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation If data in the device address...

Page 506: ...or DF only data changes are checked Type check for non real numbers is not executed Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification SR9 CY To be set when the value of S differs from the value of D To be reset when the value of S equals the value of D 10 13 DTR Data Revision Detection 10 56 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 507: ...D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the ...

Page 508: ...e 5000 target value 1000 default value Time ms 1100 700 400 400 ms time elapsed When the execution condition is switched on the data are initialized i UL SL Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL S1 DT0 K5000 S2 DT1 K1000 S3 DT2 K400 D DT10 Execution condition ON OFF DT10 Output value 5000 default value 1000 target value Time ms 1100 700 400 When the execution condition is switched on the data are...

Page 509: ...D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the ...

Page 510: ...2 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 Output value D Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 Input value S3 Output value D For control by the upper limit only the minimum value for the relevant operation unit is specified as the lower limit S1 For control by the lower limit only the maximum value for the relevant operation unit is specified as the upper limit S1 Min value Max value 0 US 32768 SS 0 ...

Page 511: ...ating point real number SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is larger than S2 10 15 LIMT Upper and Lower Limit Control WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 10 61 ...

Page 512: ... D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ H N ote 5 SF N ote 6 D F N ote 7 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is ...

Page 513: ...ower limit S1 Output value D Upper limit S2 Input value S3 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 Output value D Lower limit S1 Input value S3 Upper limit S2 0 Output value D Processing Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits SL Example 3 Operation units Single precision floating point real number SF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of ra...

Page 514: ...R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K N ote 4 Ｕ N ote 5 H N ote 6 SF N ote 7 D F N ote 8 S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Note 4 Can be specified on...

Page 515: ...address specified by D Output values are defined as follows Input value S3 0 Input value S3 Negative bias value S1 Output value D Input value S3 0 0 Output value D Input value S3 0 Input value S3 Positive bias value S2 Output value D Processing Example 1 When the operation unit is 16 bit US SS Example 2 Operation unit 32 bits UL SL Example 3 Operation units Single precision floating point real num...

Page 516: ... Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 10 17 ZONE Zone Control 10 66 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 517: ...umber constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Among data specified by S1 bits specified by S2 with the value 0 are directly output and those with the value 1 are filtered and output Filtering is carried out for the targeted bits within the time specified by S3 in 0 to 30000 ms The result is output to the area specified by D When the execution condition is switche...

Page 518: ...S2 S3 D Operand Targeted data Targeted bit Filtering time Processing result Description WX0 DT0 DT1 WR1 Device H FFFF H FF00 K500 H 0000 Setting value H 0F0F H FF0F S1 S2 S3 D Operand Targeted data Targeted bit Filtering time Processing result Description WX0 DT0 DT1 WR1 Device H FF00 K500 Setting value H 0F0F S1 S2 S3 D Operand Targeted data Targeted bit Filtering time Processing result Descripti...

Page 519: ...ame Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the filtering time S3 is out of the range 10 18 FILTR Time Constant Processing WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 10 69 ...

Page 520: ... MEMO 10 70 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 521: ...PWR Power Operation 11 29 11 15 SQR Square Root Operation 11 31 11 16 RAD Conversion Degrees Radian 11 33 11 17 DEG Conversion Radian Degrees 11 35 11 18 FINT Floating Point Real Number Data Rounding the First Decimal Point Down 11 37 11 19 FRINT Floating Point Real Number Data Rounding the First Decimal Point Off 11 39 11 20 FNEG Floating Point Real Number Data Sign Changes Negative Positive Conv...

Page 522: ...nd Down 11 61 11 29 DINT Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Down 11 64 11 30 FIX Conversion Floating Point Real Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits 11 68 11 31 DFIX Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits 11 71 11 32 ROFF Conversion Floating Point Real Number Data Integer Round to the Nearest Unit 11 75 11 33 DROFF Conversion Double pr...

Page 523: ... N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of op...

Page 524: ...D DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 1 SIN Sine Operation 11 4 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 525: ... N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of op...

Page 526: ... DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 Angle 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 2 COS Cosine Operation 11 6 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 527: ... N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of op...

Page 528: ...DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 3 TAN Tangent Operation 11 8 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 529: ...WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real ...

Page 530: ...DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF2 588190Eーー01 SF1 047198E 00 SF1 570796E 00 15 30 45 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data To be set when S angle data is out of the accessible range 11 4 ASIN Arcsine Operation 11 10 WUME FP7CPUPGR...

Page 531: ... W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double p...

Page 532: ...15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF9 659258E 01 SF1 047198E 00 SF1 570796E 00 15ｰ 30ｰ 45ｰ Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data To be set when S angle data is out of the accessible range 11 5 ACOS Arccosine Operation 11 12 WUME FP7CPUPG...

Page 533: ... E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline ...

Page 534: ...T2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 2 679392E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 15 30 45 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 6 ATAN Arctangent Operation 11 14 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 535: ...TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real num...

Page 536: ...12 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 0 000000E 00 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 Y coordinate or S2 X coordinate To be set when 0 0 is specified for S1 Y coordinate and 0 0 for S2 X coordinate 11 7 ATAN2 Conversion Coordinat...

Page 537: ...K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation A...

Page 538: ...T10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 8 SINH Hyperbolic Sine Operation 11 18 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 539: ... Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation Ac...

Page 540: ...10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 9 COSH Hyperbolic Cosine Operation 11 20 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 541: ...Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation Acc...

Page 542: ...0 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 10 TANH Hyperbolic Tangent Operation 11 22 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 543: ... 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operatio...

Page 544: ... point real number SF S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 5 000000E 00 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S calculation target data 11 11 EXP Exponential Operation 11 24 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 545: ...ly 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation According to the operation unit i LN natura...

Page 546: ...0000E 00 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S calculation target data To be set when a value that is 0 0 or less is specified for S calculation target data 11 12 LN Natural Logarithmic Operation 11 26 WUME FP7CPUPGR ...

Page 547: ... K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation ...

Page 548: ...F 5 000000E 00 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S calculation target data To be set when a value that is 0 0 or less is specified for S calculation target data 11 13 LOG Common Logarithmic Operation 11 28 WUME FP7C...

Page 549: ...E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline o...

Page 550: ...ame Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S1 data to be powered or S2 powering data To be set when 0 0 is specified for S1 data to be powered and a value that is 0 0 or less is specified for S2 powering data To be set when a negative value is specified for S1 data to be powered and a non ...

Page 551: ...te 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operat...

Page 552: ...10 DT11 SF 5 000000E 00 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S calculation target data To be set when a negative value is specified for S calculation target data 11 15 SQR Square Root Operation 11 32 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 553: ... ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation According t...

Page 554: ...t real number SF Designate 30 degrees for S S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 9 000000E 01 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 16 RAD Conversion Degrees Radian 11 34 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 555: ... ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation According t...

Page 556: ...T2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Angle Value radians SF 5 235988E 01 SF 1 047198E 00 SF 1 570796E 00 30 60 90 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S angle data 11 17 DEG Conversion Radian Degrees 11 36 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 557: ...te 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation According to ...

Page 558: ... 02 SF 1 240000E 02 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 0 000000E 00 Example 2 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF negative value S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 5 678900E 02 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 1...

Page 559: ...ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation According to...

Page 560: ... 02 SF 1 230000E 02 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 0 000000E 00 Example 2 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF negative value S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 5 678900E 02 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 1...

Page 561: ...F N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation Accordin...

Page 562: ...2 SF 1 234560E 02 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 0 000000E 00 Example 2 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF negative value S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 5 678900E 02 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 11 ...

Page 563: ... H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a single precision floating point real number SF Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outline of operation Acco...

Page 564: ...F 1 234560E 02 SF 1 234560E 02 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 0 000000E 00 Example 2 Operation unit Single precision floating point real number SF negative value S DT10 D DT2 DT10 DT11 SF 5 678900E 02 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 i SF DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specif...

Page 565: ...an be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction converts the single pre...

Page 566: ...ion SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 11 22 STOD Conversion Single precision Real Number Data Double precision Real Number 11 46 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 567: ...it device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F N ote 3 S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is a double precision floating point real number DF Outl...

Page 568: ...ion SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 11 23 DTOS Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Single precision Real Number 11 48 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 569: ...s of the device where exponent is stored data format signed 32 bit integer Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF N ote 3 D F N ote 4 S D1 D2 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specifie...

Page 570: ... positive real number 0 62500000000 40 00000000000 0 00000000000 6 DT4 DT7 DT20 DT23 DT24 DT27 DT28 DT29 Mantissa Exponent 40 0 0 6250 x the sixth power of 2 S DT4 D1 DT20 D2 DT28 i DF Example 3 Operation units Single precision real number SF negative real number 0 000000 7 000000 0 875000 3 DT10 DT11 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 Mantissa Exponent 7 0 0 875 x the cube of 2 S DT10 D1 DT2 D2 DT4 i SF Exa...

Page 571: ...set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S 11 24 DISF Separation of Mantissa and Exponent of Single precision or Double precision Real Number Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 51 ...

Page 572: ...3 D Starting address of the device where combined data is stored data format according to the operation unit Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real nu...

Page 573: ... S2 DT28 D DT4 Example 3 Operation units Single precision real number SF negative real number 0 875000 0 000000 7 000000 DT0 DT1 3 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT10 DT11 Mantissa Exponent 7 0 0 875 x the cube of 2 S1 DT2 S2 DT4 D DT10 Example 4 Operation units Double precision real number DF negative real number 40 00000000000 0 00000000000 0 62500000000 DT20 DT23 6 DT24 DT27 DT28 DT29 DT4 DT7 Mantissa Exponen...

Page 574: ... of range value is specified for S1 mantissa To be set when an out of range value is specified for S2 exponent 11 25 UNIF Combining of Mantissa and Exponent and Conversion of Single precision or Double precision Real Number 11 54 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 575: ...ifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation According...

Page 576: ...gative value S DT20 D DT10 DT20 K 789 DT21 DT22 i SS DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 U 67890 U 12345 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 1 234500E 04 Example 4 Unsigned 32 bits UL S DT0 D DT10 U 13579 i UL DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 67890 K 12345 SF 0 000000E 00 SF 1 234500E 04 Example 5 Signed 32 bits SL positive value S DT20 D DT10 K 13579 i SL DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 67890 K 12345 SF 0 000000E 00 SF ...

Page 577: ...lag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 11 26 FLT Conversion Integer Floating Point Real Number Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 57 ...

Page 578: ...device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 2 K N ote 3 Ｕ N ote 4 H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is a 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Index register I0 to IE Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation unit i...

Page 579: ...US Example 2 Signed 16 bits SS positive value Example 3 Signed 16 bits SS negative value Example 4 Unsigned 32 bits UL Example 5 Signed 32 bits SL positive value 11 27 DFLT Conversion Integer Double precision Real Number Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 59 ...

Page 580: ...L negative value Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 11 27 DFLT Conversion Integer Double precision Real Number Data 11 60 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 581: ...M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation According to the operation unit i the single precision floating point real number value which is stored in the area st...

Page 582: ...egative value S DT10 D DT0 SF 4 567890E 02 i US DT0 DT1 DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 K 0 K 234 K 0 Example 3 Signed 16 bits SS positive value S DT10 D DT20 SF 4 567890E 02 i SS DT20 DT21 DT22 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 Example 4 Signed 16 bits SS negative value S DT10 D DT20 SF 4 567890E 02 i SS DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K...

Page 583: ...F 2 468000E 02 SF 1 234567E 05 Example 8 Signed 32 bits SL negative value S DT10 D DT20 SF 1 357000E 02 i SL K 0 K 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a no...

Page 584: ...ote 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction converts the double...

Page 585: ...sing Example 1 Unsigned 16 bits US positive value Example 2 Unsigned 16 bits US negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 3 Signed 16 bits SS positive value 11 29 DINT Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Down WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 65 ...

Page 586: ...e 6 Unsigned 32 bits UL negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 7 Signed 32 bits SL positive value 11 29 DINT Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Down 11 66 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 587: ...in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S To be set when an out of range value is specified for S conversion target data 11 29 DINT Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Down WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 67 ...

Page 588: ...D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation According to the operation unit i the single precision floating point real number value which is stored in t...

Page 589: ... i SS DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT0 DT1 DT2 Example 5 Unsigned 32 bits UL positive value S DT10 D DT0 i UL DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 U 0 U 0 U 123456 K 0 K 0 K 234 K0 K0 K 234 U 0 U 0 U 0 U 0 U 0 U 234 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 4 567890E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 4 567890E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 4 567890E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 4 567890E 02 SF 2 345670E 02 SF 2...

Page 590: ...L DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 0 K 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 K 12345 SF 2 468000E 02 SF 1 234567E 05 Example 8 Signed 32 bits SL negative value S DT10 D DT20 SF 1 357000E 02 i SL DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 0 K 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non rea...

Page 591: ...ote 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instruction converts the double...

Page 592: ...xample 1 Unsigned 16 bits US positive value Example 2 Unsigned 16 bits US negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 3 Signed 16 bits SS positive value 11 31 DFIX Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits 11 72 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 593: ...nsigned 32 bits UL negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 7 Signed 32 bits SL positive value 11 31 DFIX Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 73 ...

Page 594: ...se of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S To be set when an out of range value is specified for S conversion target data 11 31 DFIX Conversion Double precision Real Number Data Integer Round Decimal Digits 11 74 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 595: ... D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices and 32 bit devices can be modified real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation According to the operation unit i the single precision floating point real number value which is stored in the area starting with S is convert...

Page 596: ... value S DT10 D DT0 i SS DT0 DT1 DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 Example 4 Coded 16 bits SS negative value S DT10 D DT0 i SS DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT0 DT1 DT2 Example 5 Unsigned 32 bits UL positive value S DT10 D DT0 i UL DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 U 235 U 0 U 0 U 0 U 0 SF 2 345670E 02 SF 3 456780E 02 SF 4 567890E 02 K 235 K 0 K 0 K 235 K 0 K 0 U 123457 U 0 U 0...

Page 597: ...10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 0 K 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 K 123457 SF 2 468000E 02 SF 1 234567E 05 Example 8 Coded 32 bits SL negative value S DT10 D DT20 SF 1 357000E 02 i SL DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 K 0 K 0 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real nu...

Page 598: ...in g Index modifie r Note 2 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX N ote 3 K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Cannot be specified when the operation unit is 16 bit integer SS US Note 2 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 3 Index register I0 to IE Outline of operation This instructi...

Page 599: ...Example 1 Unsigned 16 bits US positive value Example 2 Unsigned 16 bits US negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 3 Signed 16 bits SS positive value 11 33 DROFF Conversion Double precision Real Number Integer Round to the Nearest Unit WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 79 ...

Page 600: ...signed 32 bits UL negative value Operation error occurs if an unsigned integer is specified for the operation unit and a negative value is converted Example 7 Signed 32 bits SL positive value 11 33 DROFF Conversion Double precision Real Number Integer Round to the Nearest Unit 11 80 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 601: ...se of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when a non real number is specified for S To be set when an out of range value is specified for S conversion target data 11 33 DROFF Conversion Double precision Real Number Integer Round to the Nearest Unit WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 11 81 ...

Page 602: ... MEMO 11 82 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 603: ...ta Time Data Hours Minutes and Seconds 12 4 12 3 CADD Clock Addition 12 6 12 4 CSUB Clock Subtraction 12 8 12 5 TMSEC Calculation Clock Data Seconds Data from the Base Time 12 10 12 6 SECTM Calculation Seconds Data from the Base Time Clock Data 12 12 12 7 TIMEWT Setting of Clock Calendar 12 14 12 8 SUMMER Daylight Saving Time Acquisition 12 16 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 1 ...

Page 604: ...Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation Time data comprised of 1 word for hours 1 word for minutes and 1 word for seconds which is stored in the area starting with S is converted into a 2 word integer data representing seconds The calculation result is stored in the area starting with D Processing Example Convert 3 hours 54 ...

Page 605: ...tion SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the time data range is exceeded 12 1 HMSS Conversion Time Data Hours Minutes and Seconds Seconds Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 3 ...

Page 606: ...modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation 2 word integer data representing seconds which is stored in the area starting with S is converted into time data comprised of 1 word for hours 1 word for minutes and 1 word for seconds The calculation result is stored in the area starting with D Processing Example Convert 12 345 seconds S DT...

Page 607: ...on SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the seconds data range is exceeded 12 2 SHMS Conversion Seconds Data Time Data Hours Minutes and Seconds WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 5 ...

Page 608: ...peran d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation Time data hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S2 are added to the clock data year month day hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S1 The calculation result is stored in the...

Page 609: ... 23 K 45 K 2 K 1 year month day hours minutes seconds K 12 K 5 K 18 K 4 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the clock data range and or the time data range is exceeded To be set when the addition result is out of the accessible range 12 3 CADD Clock Additi...

Page 610: ...ran d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation Time data hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S2 are subtracted from the clock data year month day hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S1 The calculation result is stored i...

Page 611: ...23 K 45 K 31 K 12 year month day hours minutes seconds K 11 K 12 K 30 K 34 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the clock data range and or the time data range is exceeded To be set when the subtraction result is out of the accessible range 12 4 CSUB Clock ...

Page 612: ...a Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation From the clock data year month day hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S time elapsed from the base time is calculated The calculation result is stored in the area st...

Page 613: ... data DT10 DT11 Example Calculate seconds data against the base time from 08 54 19 January 1 2012 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the clock data range is exceeded 12 5 TMSEC Calculation Clock Data Seconds Data from the Base Time WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 11 ...

Page 614: ...r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation From the time elapsed from the base time stored in the area starting with S clock data year month day hours minutes and seconds is calculated The calculation result is stored in the area starting with D The base time is 2001 1 1 00 00 00 Processing Example Calculate data from 1 325 408 059 seconds S...

Page 615: ...ption SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the clock data range is exceeded 12 6 SECTM Calculation Seconds Data from the Base Time Clock Data WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 13 ...

Page 616: ...an d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation The clock data year month day hours minutes and seconds stored in the area starting with S is set as RTC data for the CPU unit The range of clock data that can be set for the calendar timer of the FP7 CPU unit is as follows 2...

Page 617: ... 54 K 19 day of week Update 0 Day of week data Sat Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sun Precautions for programming Consistency of the day of week data with the date is not checked Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the clock data range is exceeded To be set when the day of week range is exceeded 12 7 TIMEWT Set...

Page 618: ...e that stores clock data when daylight saving time ends Specify the clock data in the daylight saving time The formats of the clock data of S1 S2 are the following four words Word Sx 0 Month Sx 1 Day Sx 2 Hours Sx 3 Minutes S3 Time difference within the daylight saving time period Unit minute Settable range 0 to 180 minutes D The following eight words are the formats for the enable disable clock d...

Page 619: ...eriod specified by S1 and S2 clock data is corrected by S3 time difference and the corrected clock data is set in the area that starts with D If the clock data is within the specified period 1 is set in D the clock data is corrected and the corrected clock data is set in the area from D 1 to D 7 If the clock data is outside of the specified period 0 is set in D and the clock data is set in the are...

Page 620: ...hin the specified period the clock data is corrected and stored Descripti on Value SD50 Year 15 SD51 Month 8 SD52 Day 31 SD53 Hours 1 SD54 Minutes 23 SD55 Seconds 45 SD56 Day of the week 1 Descripti on Value DT100 flag 1 Enabled DT101 Year 15 DT102 Month 8 DT103 Day 31 DT104 Hours 2 DT105 Minutes 23 DT106 Seconds 45 DT107 Day of the week 1 Example 2 When the actual time is 06 07 08 on November 20 ...

Page 621: ...DT107 Day of the week 5 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 or S2 clock data is out of the range To be set when S3 time difference is out of the range 12 8 SUMMER Daylight Saving Time Acquisition WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12 19 ...

Page 622: ... MEMO 12 20 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 623: ...ation History Clearing 13 10 13 7 OPHSAVE Operation History Save to SD Card 13 11 13 8 ERR Self Diagnostic Error Code Set 13 13 13 9 WDTRES Watchdog Timer Reset 13 15 13 10 SCOPY System Area Copy 13 16 13 11 GETSTNO Acquiring Starting Word Number of Specified Slot 13 18 13 12 POSSET Setting of Positioning Starting Table 13 19 13 13 PSTRD Acquiring Axis Status 13 21 13 14 PERRD Acquiring Error Warn...

Page 624: ...ation unit is an unsigned integer US Note 3 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction requests to start the logging trace function for the number specified by n There is no problem even if the logging trace start request is made while the logging trace is being sta...

Page 625: ... command has been accepted logging trace start logging trace stop logging trace registration To be set when the logging trace stop has been requested To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 13 1 LOGST Logging Trace Start Request WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 13 3 ...

Page 626: ... US Note 3 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction requests to stop the logging trace function for the number specified by n There is no problem even if the logging trace stop request is made while the logging trace is being stopped or the logging trace stop is b...

Page 627: ... command has been accepted logging trace start logging trace stop logging trace registration To be set when the logging trace start has been requested To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 13 2 LOGED Logging Trace Stop Request WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 13 5 ...

Page 628: ...eger US Note 3 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction performs data logging for the logging trace with the number specified by n The logging trace is set using the configuration menu of the tool software FPWIN GR7 The SMPL instruction is used for setting the tri...

Page 629: ... when the data logging condition of logging trace number is set to other than Instruction To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the logging trace stops 13 3 SMPL Sampling Trace WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 13 7 ...

Page 630: ...E C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation Startup for operation histories is requested using the group number specified by S Even if startup is requested while operation histories are being started no problem will occur No processing Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when a startup request is issued to any group whose operation histories have not been registered To be set in...

Page 631: ...S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation Stoppage for operation histories is requested using the group number specified by S Even if stoppage is requested while operation histories are stopped no problem will occur No processing Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when a startup request is issued to any group whose operation histories have not been registered To be set in ...

Page 632: ...peration histories are initialized using the group number specified by S After initialization is completed the number of write operations in operation histories becomes zero If the power is turned off while operation histories are being initialized initialization may not be performed correctly Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when a startup request is issued to any group whose...

Page 633: ... 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 S4 Outline of operation The operation histories of the group number specified by S1 are output to the SD card in the order specified by S2 ascending or descending order of occurrence time S3 specifies the language number for which operation histories are to...

Page 634: ...ruction execution is complete SD memory card access instruction execution completed SR3B Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SD memory card access instruction execution result SR3C Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER The flag is set when an out of range value is specifi...

Page 635: ...diagnostic error code specified by n is stored in the self diagnostic abnormality code register SD0 and the self diagnosis error occurrence flag SR0 is set It is also possible to describe multiple ERR instructions that set the same error code Setting of a self diagnostic error code n n self diagnostic error code can be set within the range from U1000 to U2999 n Operation when an error occurs U 100...

Page 636: ...4 RTC backup battery voltage drop hold SR25 RTC backup battery voltage drop real SR26 SNTP time update fail Device No Application SD0 Self diagnostic error code SD2 Error occurrence slot number SD3 Warning occurrence slot number SD4 Verify error occurrence slot number SD7 Hold operation error occurrence address PB number SD8 Hold operation error occurrence address 32 bit lower address SD9 Hold ope...

Page 637: ...13 9 WDTRES Watchdog Timer Reset Ladder diagram Outline of operation The watchdog timer is reset Flag operations No change occurs 13 9 WDTRES Watchdog Timer Reset WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 13 15 ...

Page 638: ...ailable devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 D Outline of operation This instruction copies data in the areas specified by S1 S2 and S3 to the area specified by D Processing Example 1 When S2 and S3 are within the system monitor area S1 U0 S3 U4 D DT0 Ex...

Page 639: ...or does not occur The area from S2 to the upper limit of the system area is copied Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S1 is other than 0 To be set when S2 is larger than S3 To be set when S2 is out of the accessible range To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range 13 10 SCO...

Page 640: ...t in D Precautions for programming An operation error occurs when a slot number without unit registration is specified when an I O map has been registered An operation error occurs when the number of a slot in which no unit is installed is specified when no I O map has been registered Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modi...

Page 641: ...ble devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 Outline of operation It is described right before the program which starts positioning and the positioning data table to be started is set For the axis number of the positioning units specified by S1 and S2 the da...

Page 642: ...ation enabled flag X118 1st axis BUSY Y110 Operation enabled flag Positioning start for 1st axis Positioning start up U1 Slot number Axis number Table number DF DF Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the slot number and or the axis number is out of the available range 13 12 POSSET Setting of Position...

Page 643: ...ecified by S1 and S2 the main flag status is acquired as the axis status The acquired information is converted into integer values in hexadecimal format in accordance with the relevant allocation and stored in the area specified by D Type of axis status information Status information Description Tool operation Turned ON in the case of tool operation using Configurator PM regardless of the specifie...

Page 644: ...is installed and the starting word number Example The tool operation flag is X104 for slot number 1 if the starting word is number 10 Example of processing Axis status information for the first axis of the positioning unit attached to slot number 3 is read bit Status information Axis 1 Value 0 Tool operation IN4 0 1 Error annunciation IN60 0 2 Warning annunciation IN68 0 3 BUSY IN18 1 4 Operation ...

Page 645: ...Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation For the axis number of the positioning units specified by S1 and S2 the error codes and warning codes stored in each annunciation buffer 1 are acquired The error codes are stored in the area specified by D and warning codes in the area speci...

Page 646: ...0015D UM0019C UM0019D Error code annunciation buffer 3 UM0012E UM0012F UM0013E UM0013F UM0014E UM0014F UM0015E UM0015F UM0019E UM0019F Error code annunciation buffer 4 UM00130 UM00131 UM00140 UM00141 UM00150 UM00151 UM00160 UM00161 UM001A0 UM001A1 Error code annunciation buffer 5 UM00132 UM00133 UM00142 UM00143 UM00152 UM00153 UM00162 UM00163 UM001A2 UM001A3 Error code annunciation buffer 6 UM0013...

Page 647: ...tion buffer 5 UM001CA UM001CB UM001DA UM001DB UM001EA UM001EB UM001FA UM001FB UM0023A UM0023B Warning code annunciation buffer 6 UM001CC UM001CD UM001DC UM001DD UM001EC UM001ED UM001FC UM001FD UM0023C UM0023D Warning code annunciation buffer 7 UM001CE UM001CF UM001DE UM001DF UM001EE UM001EF UM001FE UM001FF UM0023E UM0023F 13 14 PERRD Acquiring Error Warning in the Positioning Unit WUME FP7CPUPGR 1...

Page 648: ... integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction clears the errors warnings for the unit installed in the slot number specified by S The UCLR instruction can clear the errors warnings for the following units High speed counter unit positioning unit pulse output unit motion control unit serial communication un...

Page 649: ...tion SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the slot number and or the axis number is out of the available range 13 15 UCLR Error Warning Clear WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 13 27 ...

Page 650: ... MEMO 13 28 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 651: ...INT Instruction Shared Conversion Form Table 14 70 14 15 TIMEstr Date and Time Character String Conversion 14 75 14 16 SCMP String Compare 14 81 14 17 SADD String Addition 14 83 14 18 LEN Obtainment of String Length 14 85 14 19 LENGTH Search String Length Terminating NULL 14 87 14 20 SSRC String Search 14 89 14 21 RIGHT Takeout of the Right Side of a String 14 92 14 22 LEFT Takeout of the Left Sid...

Page 652: ...IGHT Takeout of the Right Side of a String With Storage Area Size 14 130 14 34 ELEFT Takeout of the Left Side of a String With Storage Area Size 14 133 14 35 EMIDR Data Read from a Given Position in the String With Storage Area Size 14 136 14 36 EMIDW Rewrite from a Given Position in the String With Storage Area Size 14 139 14 37 ESREP Replacement of a String With Storage Area Size 14 142 14 High ...

Page 653: ...ilable devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K N ote 1 Ｕ N ote 2 H N ote 3 SF D F S1 S2 S3 Note 4 D Note 1 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Note 3 Can be specified onl...

Page 654: ...thod 0 Addition 1 Subtraction 2 Exclusive OR Calculation start position bytes from S2 0 to F Storage start position bytes from D 0 to F Data to be converted 0 Binary data 1 byte 1 ASCII code 2 bytes As indicated below calculation should be carried out as specified for every eight bits H 25 00100101 a 0 H 30 00110000 b 1 H 31 00110001 c H 23 00100011 d R H 52 01010010 e a b c d e Specified calculat...

Page 655: ... Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification 14 1 BCC Block Check Code Calculation WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 5 ...

Page 656: ... 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K N ote 1 Ｕ N ote 2 H N ote 3 SF D F S1 S2 S3 Note 4 D Note 1 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is an i...

Page 657: ...0101 0011 0000 a 1 H 3123 0011 0001 0010 0011 b RC H 5243 0101 0010 0100 0011 c a b c Specified calculation S1 K0 CRC 16 S1 K1 CCITT Generating polynomial CRC 16 X 16 X 15 X 2 1 Generating polynomial CRCITT X 16 X 12 X 5 1 Specification of control data S1 H 計算方法の指定計算開始位置 S2 からのバイト数 0 F 格納開始位置 D からのバイト数 0 F 0 固定設定値 CRCタイプ初期値送り方法演算結果のXOR 0 CRC 16 FFFFH 右送り 0000H 1 CCITT 2 CRC 16 0000H 注 3 CCITT...

Page 658: ... H 3030 H 2E0A 0 1 CR XS 00 00 Characters 0 1 CR XS 00 00 Characters CRC Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits US Calculation method CRC 16 Initial value FFFFH Right shift XOR 0000H DT0 DT0 H 3025 H 2331 H 4352 H 5853 H 3030 S1 CRCITT DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 S2 Header of target data S3 Length of target data 12 bytes D Calculation result CRC US H 1 DT0 U12 DT6 H 3030 H 0000 DT5 DT6 DT5 DT6 H 302...

Page 659: ...1 CRCITT DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 S2 Header of target data S3 Length of target data 12 bytes D Calculation result CRC US H 5 DT0 U12 DT6 H 3030 H 0000 DT5 DT6 DT5 DT6 H 3025 H 2331 H 4352 H 5853 H 3030 H 3030 H 6194 0 1 CR XS 00 00 Characters 0 1 CR XS 00 00 Characters CRCITT Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modifi...

Page 660: ...TE C E IX K N ote 2 Ｕ N ote 3 H N ote 4 SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 4 Can be specified only when the opera...

Page 661: ...1 DT12 DT13 DT14 H 4443 H 4241 DC BA characters S1 DT0 S2 DT1 D DT10 DT3 Example 3 Operation unit 16 bits US SS DT10 S1 DT0 H 1234 H 5678 S2 DT2 DT1 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 H 3433 H 3231 43 21 characters S1 DT0 S2 DT2 D DT10 DT3 D D D H 3837 H 3635 87 65 i US SS i UL SL i US SS Precautions for programming The two characters that make up one byte are interchanged when stored Converts two bytes as one s...

Page 662: ... access index modification To be set when the number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the area of the conversion range To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when S2 is specified as 0 or a negative value 14 3 HEXA Conversion HEX Hexadecimal ASCII 14 12 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 663: ...W O TS C S TE C E IX K N ote 1 Ｕ N ote 2 H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Outline of operation This instruction converts the ASCII code string into a hexadecimal figure The ASCII code stored in the area specified by S1 is converted into a hexadecimal figure an...

Page 664: ...DT0 DT1 DT3 DT4 S2 DT2 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 H CDAB BA DC characters D H 3231 H 3433 H 3635 H 3837 H 0008 S1 DT0 DT1 DT3 DT2 DT5 S2 DT4 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 H 3412 H 7856 21 43 characters D 65 87 Example 4 Operation unit 16 bits US SS No of characters to be converted is an odd number S1 DT0 S2 DT4 D DT10 H 3231 H 3433 H 3635 H 3837 H 0007 S1 DT0 DT1 DT3 DT2 DT5 S2 DT4 DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT...

Page 665: ... 2 S1 1 S1 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the number of characters specified by S2 exceeds the area of the conversion range To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when S2 is specified as 0 or a negative value To be set when the ASCII codes specified by S1 contains charac...

Page 666: ...U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction converts up to 8 digit BCD data into an ASCII code string The BCD figure stored in the area specified by S1 is converted into ASCII codes The conversion result is stor...

Page 667: ...le 1 Operation unit 16 bits US DT10 S1 DT0 H 1234 H 0002 S2 DT1 DT2 DT11 DT12 H 3433 H 3231 43 21 characters S1 DT0 S2 DT1 D DT10 D Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits US DT10 S1 DT0 H 1234 H 1002 S2 DT1 DT2 DT11 DT12 H 3231 H 3433 S1 DT0 S2 DT1 D DT10 D 21 43 characters H 0004 Example 3 Operation unit 32 bits UL DT10 S1 DT0 H 5678 H 1234 S2 DT2 DT1 DT11 DT12 DT13 H 3837 H 3635 87 65 characters S1 DT...

Page 668: ...direction S１ 1 S1 ASCII Code D 3 D 2 D 1 D Reverse direction BCD BCD Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the data specified by S1 contain non BCD data To be set when the number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the S1 area To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when S2 is spec...

Page 669: ...W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction converts up to 8 character ASCII code string into BCD data The ASCII code stored in the area specified by S1 is converted into BCD data and stored in the area specified ...

Page 670: ... a 4 digit BCD H constant according to the following format H Size of data to be converted 1 to 16 words Conversion direction 0 Forward direction 1 Reverse direction 0 Conversion example Example 1 Operation unit 16 bits US H 0004 H 3433 DT10 S1 DT0 H 3231 DT4 DT1 DT11 DT12 DT13 H 3412 21 43 Characters S1 DT0 S2 DT2 D DT10 DT3 D Forward direction 4 characters S2 DT2 DT14 i US Example 2 Operation un...

Page 671: ...13 H 5678 H 1234 21 43 Characters S1 DT0 S2 DT4 D DT10 DT3 D 65 87 Reverse direction 8 characters S2 DT4 i UL Example 5 Operation unit 32 bits UL H 1007 H 3837 H 3635 H 3433 DT10 S1 DT0 H 3231 DT2 DT1 DT11 DT12 DT13 H 4567 H 0123 21 43 Characters S1 DT0 S2 DT4 D DT10 DT3 D 65 87 Reverse direction 7 characters S2 DT4 i UL Precautions for programming The two characters that make up one byte are inte...

Page 672: ...n To be set when the ASCII codes specified by S1 contain data other than 0 to 9 To be set when the number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the S1 area To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when S2 is specified as 0 To be set when the conversion direction of S2 is out of the range To be set when the conversion data size of S2 is out of the range 14 6 ABCD Conversion Decima...

Page 673: ...X K N ote 2 Ｕ N ote 3 H N ote 4 SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 4 Can be specified only when the operation uni...

Page 674: ...H 3030 H 312D S2 DT1 S1 DT0 H 0006 Example 2 Operation unit 16 bits SS DT10 H FF9C DT11 DT12 H 2020 characters S1 DT0 S2 DT1 D DT10 D K 100 DT0 H FF9C K 100 DT10 to DT12 100 DT10 Example 3 Operation unit 32 bits UL DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 S1 DT0 S2 DT2 D DT10 D H FF9C H FFFF H 000A S1 DT0 DT1 S2 DT2 2 4 4 9 characters 6 9 1 7 6 9 DT0 H FFFF FF9C U 4294967196 DT10 to DT14 4294967196 H 312D H 3030 H 202...

Page 675: ...cess index modification To be set when the number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the D area To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when the resulting number of bytes exceeds the number of bytes specified by S2 14 7 BINA Conversion BIN Decimal ASCII WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 25 ...

Page 676: ... WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K N ote 2 Ｕ N ote 3 H N ote 4 SF D F S1 S2 Note 5 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices 32 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Real number constants and character constants cannot be specified Note 2 Can be specified only when the operation unit is signed integer SS SL Note 3 Can be specified only when the operation unit is unsigned integer US UL Note 4 Can be specifi...

Page 677: ...rom the area specified by S1 is converted into a decimal figure and stored in the area specified by D If a negative sign is contained in the ASCII code specified by S1 specify SS or SL for the operation unit An operation error occurs if operation units US or UL are used 14 8 ABIN Conversion Decimal ASCII BIN WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 27 ...

Page 678: ...K 100 DT0 to DT2 100 DT10 H FF9C K 100 H FF9C Example 3 Operation unit 32 bits UL DT10 S1 DT0 DT2 DT1 DT11 characters S1 DT0 S2 DT5 D DT10 D S2 DT5 U 429467196 DT0 to DT4 4294967196 DT10 to DT11 H FFFF FF9C U 4294967196 DT3 DT4 DT12 H FFFF H 3234 H 3439 H 3639 H 3137 H 3639 H 0006 H FF9C Example 4 Operation unit 32 bits SL DT10 S1 DT0 DT2 DT1 DT11 characters S1 DT0 S2 DT5 D DT10 D S2 DT5 K 100 DT0...

Page 679: ...ccess index modification To be set when the number of bytes specified by S2 exceeds the D area To be set when the conversion result exceeds the area To be set when S1 contains character ASCII codes other than 0 to 9 sign code or space 14 8 ABIN Conversion Decimal ASCII BIN WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 29 ...

Page 680: ...teger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 N Note 1 D Note 1 To be handled as a 32 bit integer UL regardless of operation unit Outline of operation This instruction converts the binary data stored in the area starting with S2 into ASCII codes For S1 specify the type number of digits and precision of the data to be conv...

Page 681: ...ing point real number Floating point ASCII or exponential notation ASCII A comma is added BCD Postfix characters are added H Postfix characters are added Type of data to be converted S1 Type of data to be converted Number of characters of precision m d i u x X b represents the number of characters in numerical strings f represents the number of characters after the decimal point g represents the n...

Page 682: ... f 64 bit double precision real number data Floating point number ASCII data DF e 32 bit single precision real number data Exponential notation ASCII data SF e 5 2e 5 2e 5 2e 05 2e 5 2e e E 64 bit double precision real number data Convert to exponential notation ASCII data DF g 32 bit single precision real number data Exponential notation ASCII data or floating point ASCII data whichever is shorte...

Page 683: ... specified with Total number of characters and Number of characters of precision It is specified with n m n or m etc n Total number of characters m Number of characters of precision Number of characters of precision d i u x X b represent the number of characters in numerical strings f e E represent the number of characters after the decimal point g G represent the number of significant figures If ...

Page 684: ... 457 10 3e SF 1234 567 1 235e 03 10 3e SF 1234 567 1 235e 03 Specification of another output format for numerical data type x H 12A 0x12a 0x is added Another output type is automatically given by adding X H 12A 0X12A 0X is added 8 0f SF 123 4567 123 is always added 10 0e SF 1234 567 1 e 03 10 3E SF 1234 567 1 E 03 9 0g SF 1234 1234 0 is always added and 0 after the decimal point is not omitted 9G ...

Page 685: ... S2 1 S2 Storage start position 1 bytes Conversion data amount 2 DT0 U 1234 H 04D2 DT100 to DT103 1234 DT1 U 65480 H FFC8 DT104 to DT107 65480 Example 2 Converting signed 16 bit binary data 2 data to decimal ASCII data 5 digits x 2 The high byte of DT100 is set as the beginning of the storage area Zero padding is used to store the data H 36 6 0 H 30 0 5 0 2 1 4 3 H 3530 H 302D H 3433 H 3231 H FFC8...

Page 686: ...nt 2 DT0 to DT1 U 1234 H 0000 04D2 DT100 to DT102 1234 DT2 to DT3 U 4294967240 H FFFF FFC8 DT102 to DT103 56 H FFC8 H 0000 DT2 DT1 K 56 4 6 5 Example 4 Converting signed 32 bit binary data 2 data to decimal ASCII data 10 digits x 2 The low byte of DT100 is set as the beginning of the storage area It is right aligned high word side and a space is inserted before the data is stored H 2020 H 2020 H 2...

Page 687: ... 16 bit data into decimal ASCII data 10 digits ASCII data reverse direction 00020001 Storage start position 0 D 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 Convert S2 and S2 1 S2 S2 1 S2 Storage start position 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 DT0 U 1234 H 04D2 DT100 to DT104 01234 DT1 U 65480 H FFC8 DT105 to DT109 65480 4 5 0 8 H 3038 H 3435 DT108 DT109 H FFC8 DT1 U 65480 DT2 Example 6 Converting unsigned 32...

Page 688: ... position 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 DT0 to DT1 U 1234 H 0000 04D2 DT100 to DT105 1234 DT2 to DT3 U 4294967240 H FFFF FFC8 DT106 to DT110 4294967240 4 9 6 9 2 7 0 4 H 3034 H 3237 H 3639 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT111 H 0000 DT2 DT1 U 4294967240 S2 S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 Example 7 Converting unsigned 16 bit binary data 2 data to hexadecimal ASCII data 8 digits comma x 2 The low byte of DT100 is set as the b...

Page 689: ...he low byte of DT100 is set as the beginning of the storage area It is stored right aligned high word side for 6 significant figures The characters 0x that represent Hex data are added H 7830 H 3938 H ABCD H 3332 H 3130 x 0 0 0 x 0 1 0 3 2 H 7830 H 3030 H 0089 H 0123 DT100 DT3 DT101 DT102 DT103 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 D DT104 i UL S1 8 6x N H DT0 DT4 DT105 DT106 DT107 H 123 Convert 32 bit data i...

Page 690: ...020000 Storage start position 0 D 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 Convert S2 and S2 1 S2 S2 1 S2 Storage start position 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 DT0 H 0123 DT100 to DT102 23010 is the data that is converted from H0123 DT1 H 3456 DT102 to DT104 56340 is the data that is converted from H3456 H 3456 DT1 DT2 H 123 H 3456 DT105 Example 10 Converting unsigned 32 bit BCD data 2 data to decimal A...

Page 691: ...loating point real number data 2 data to floating point ASCII data 8 digits x 2 The high byte of DT100 is set as the beginning of the storage area It is stored right aligned high word side A decimal point is added followed by no digit 2E 2E H 20 H 2020 H 2020 H 20 3 2 2 1 1 H 3231 H 2D20 H 3332 H 3120 123 4567 DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 D DT104 i SF S1 8 0f N H DT0 DT105 DT1...

Page 692: ... Storage start position 0 D 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 Convert S2 and S2 2 S2 Storage start position 0 bytes Conversion data amount 2 DT0 to DT3 123 4567 DT100 to DT104 1 23e 02 DT4 to DT7 12 34567 DT105 to DT109 1 23e 01 0 H 302B DT108 DT109 12 34567 DT2 DT4 DT110 DT1 DT3 S2 S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 Example 13 Converting 32 bit single precision floating point real number data 2 data to floating point...

Page 693: ... 3 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not an available operation unit To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not a control character To be set when the number of ASCII code digits specified by N exceeds the maximum number of digits for the co...

Page 694: ...o be handled as a 32 bit integer UL regardless of operation unit Outline of operation This instruction checks whether the specified ASCII code string can be converted using the ATOB instruction According to the control characters specified by S1 this instruction checks whether the ASCII code stored in the area specified by S2 can be normally converted using the conversion method specified by N If ...

Page 695: ...ification To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not an available operation unit To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not a control character To be set when the number of ASCII code digits specified by N exceeds the maximum number of digits for the control characters specified by S1 To be set when the storage start position specified by N is out of the range To ...

Page 696: ...d result Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 N Note 1 D Note 1 To be handled as a 32 bit unsigned integer regardless of operation unit Outline of operation This instruction converts the ASCII code string data stored in the area starting with S2 i...

Page 697: ... operation units Data range ASCII data before conversion BIN data after conversion nd Unsigned decimal ASCII data Unsigned 16 bit data US U0 to U65 535 Signed decimal ASCII data Signed 16 bit data SS K 32 768 to K32 767 Unsigned decimal ASCII data Unsigned 32 bit data UL U0 to U4 294 967 295 Signed decimal ASCII data Signed 32 bit data SL K 2 147483 648 to K2 147 483 647 nx Hexadecimal ASCII data ...

Page 698: ...onversion starting position Specify the header of the character string to convert from the relative position of the low byte of S2 The round numbers in the following diagram indicate the relative position The character string to be converted starts from relative position for H00 and from relative position for H1 H00 Forward direction H01 Reverse direction Conversion direction H0 to H FF Conversion...

Page 699: ...high word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data For empty digits of the storage area zeros 0 are inserted H 4241 B A D C 9 8 3 2 1 0 0 0 H 3938 H 3332 H 4443 H 3030 H 3130 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i UL S1 6x N H DT5 Converts hexadecimal ASCII data 6 digit to 32 bit data ASCII data forward direction 00020000 Conversion starting position 0 S2 0 byte Conversion...

Page 700: ...n starting position 0 S2 0 byte Conversion starting position 0 byte Amount of data to be converted 2 DT0 to DT2 000123 DT100 H 0000 0123 DT3 to DT5 89ABCD DT101 H 0089 ABCD DT6 DT100 D DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 H 0000 H ABCD H 89ABCD H 123 H 0089 H 0123 When the number of characters is smaller than the number of converted bits the portions that are lacking are padded with 0 Example 4 Converting two ...

Page 701: ...erse direction the low word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data H 4241 B A 4 2 1 3 2C H 20 H 3420 H 2C33 H 3231 H 04AB H 0123 DT0 DT101 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i US S1 x N H DT100 DT102 DT5 Converts hexadecimal ASCII data to 16 bit data Data end ASCII data reverse direction 00020101 Conversion starting position 1 S2 1 byte D Conversion starting position 1 byt...

Page 702: ... If there is no specification for the number of digits it is processed considering commas as the data delimiter It is converted in reverse direction the low word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data SF 45 6 SF 12 3 2C H 20 H 2020 H 2020 H 20 3 5 4 6 2 1 H 362E H 3534 H 332E H 3231 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i SF S1 f N H DT100 DT5 DT6 DT7 Converts floating po...

Page 703: ...DT6 DT7 Converts exponential notation ASCII data to 32 bit single precision real number data Data end ASCII data reverse direction 00020101 Conversion starting position 1 S2 1 byte D Conversion starting position 1 byte Amount of data to be converted 2 DT0 to DT5 1 2345E 12 DT100 to DT101 SF 1 2345E 12 DT6 to DT10 1 23E 23 DT102 to DT103 SF 1 23E 23 2 H 322D DT8 DT9 SF 1 23E 23 DT102 DT104 DT10 DT1...

Page 704: ...reverse direction the low word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data 36 H 20 K 1234 K 56 H 352D 5 6 2 1 4 3 H 2020 H 3433 H 3231 H FFC8 H 04D2 DT0 DT101 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i SS S1 5d N H DT100 DT102 DT5 Converts decimal ASCII data 5 digit to 16 bit data ASCII data reverse direction 00020101 Conversion starting position 1 S2 1 byte D Conversion starting pos...

Page 705: ...ing two decimal ASCII data 10 digits to two 32 bit signed binary data decimal The conversion starts from the low byte of DT0 It is converted in reverse direction the low word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data H 3635 6 5 H 3433 4 3 H 2020 H 2020 H 2020 2 1 H 2020 H 2020 H 3231 H 2020 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i SL S1 10d N H DT100 DT5 DT6 DT7 Converts deci...

Page 706: ...e conversion starts from the low byte of DT0 It is converted in forward direction the high word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data For empty digits of the storage area zeros 0 are inserted 2 1 H 3231 H 3030 0 0 H 3635 6 5 8 7 4 3 3 2 1 0 0 0 H 3433 H 3332 H 3837 H 3030 H 3130 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 characters S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i UL S1 8b N H DT5 Converts decimal ASCII data 8 digit ...

Page 707: ...ion 0 S2 0 byte Conversion starting position 0 byte Amount of data to be converted 2 DT0 to DT3 0000123 DT100 to DT101 H 0000 0123 DT3 to DT6 1234567 DT102 to DT103 H 0123 4567 DT6 DT100 D DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 H 0000 H 4567 H 01234567 H 00000123 H 0123 H 0123 When the number of characters is smaller than the number of converted bits the portions that are lacking are padded with 0 3 Amount of co...

Page 708: ...s ending with NULL to two 16 bit binary data decimal The conversion starts from the high byte of DT0 It is converted in reverse direction the low word side of S2 is considered as high order numerical data It is processed considering commas as the data delimiter and NULL as end of the data NULL H 38 H37 1 H00 H 31 H 36 H35 H 2C H34 H 33 H32 U5678 U1234 DT0 DT101 DT1 DT2 DT3 S2 DT0 D DT100 S2 DT4 i ...

Page 709: ...the range is exceeded during indirect access index modification To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not an available operation unit To be set when the conversion format specified by S1 is not a control string To be set when the number of digits for the conversion format specified by S1 is 28 or more To be set when the number of digits for the conversion format specified by S1 i...

Page 710: ...ts the character constant specified by S to an ASCII code The result is stored in the area starting with D Character constants should be put between double quotations for specification From 0 to 256 characters can be specified for a character constant The number of characters is stored in 1 word at the beginning of the storage area specified by D In the subsequent areas the character data converte...

Page 711: ...acter data of the D area from before performing the operation is overwritten Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range Reference Using FPWIN GR7 to enter instructions Use the following procedure to enter instructions 1 Press Func F6 The Instruction list...

Page 712: ...9 Press either the Overwrite or Insert button 14 12 SSET Conversion Character Constant ASCII Code 14 62 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 713: ...t u v w x y z DEL 8 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 9 A ヲｱｲｳｴｵﾔﾕﾖｯ B ーアイウエオカキクケコサシスセソ C タチツテトナニヌネノハヒフヘホマ D ミムメモヤユヨラリルレロワン E F 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 C R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 ...

Page 714: ...his instruction is used for creating texts of mails etc Processing ASCII code texts are created according to the specified text creation form The text creation form can be specified using the operand S1 SSET instruction or the mail setting screen of FPWIN GR7 Created texts can be connected using the SADD instruction The maximum size of a mail text is 4096 bytes for sending an event mail and 256 by...

Page 715: ...rsion form An operation error occurs when it exceeds 16 digits The maximum number of characters after conversion for a single datum excluding s and S is 32 An operation error occurs when it exceeds 32 characters The maximum number of characters for s or S after conversion is 4096 All strings that are not recognized as conversion forms are treated as main texts Example Conversion forms that do not ...

Page 716: ...for Lg Data for s No of byte Data part H 6f o DT114 DT115 H 46 F H 6f o H 72 r Setting example Example 1 When inserting into the text two conversion forms d that represent 16 bit signed integers and a linefeed code n In the place of the conversion form d the ASCII code that is equivalent to the integer data specified by S2 is inserted If a number of digits is not specified for the conversion form ...

Page 717: ...F o H 20 H 72 r H 3A H 41 A H 32 2 H 20 H 65 e H 72 r H 65 e H 46 F H 6F o H 72 r H 42 B H 38 8 H 67 g H 65 e H 73 s H 43 C H 35 5 H 64 d H 67 g H 65 e H 73 s H 43 C H 0D CR H 6C l H 6F o H 3A H 72 r H 65 e DT222 DT223 H 00 H 2E H 20 H 20 H 20 H 20 H 20 H 20 H 64 d H 65 e Example 2 When inserting into the text a conversion form d that represents a 16 bit signed integer In the place of the conversi...

Page 718: ...ta for S2 will have no effect on the conversion results Image of mail text Tab Normal operation S1 tNormal operation S2 DT1 D DT50 Setting values DT1 DT2 DT3 DT50 No of bytes DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 DT55 DT56 H 72 r DT57 DT58 DT59 Data part H 70 p H 20 SPACE H 61 a H 72 r H 4e N U 11 H 74 t H 6f o H 65 e H 6f o H 6c l H 6d m H 6f o H 09 HT H 61 a H 69 i H 6e n Example 4 When inserting into the text tw...

Page 719: ... N H 3A H 79 y H 69 i H 63 c H 41 A H 6F o H 20 SPACE H 2C Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when an out of range value is specified for parameters To be set when the text creation form exceeds 4096 characters To be set when texts exceed 4096 bytes To be set when the conversion form is specified by a...

Page 720: ...re added H Postfix characters are added Type of data to be converted 1 S1 Ｌ L Specify for 32 bit integer data or 64 bit real number data Type of data to be converted 2 Specify the total number of characters n and the number of characters of precision m with n m n or m The number of characters of precision m changes according to the type of conversion data No of characters after conversion and the ...

Page 721: ...Lg 5 2Lg 5 2Lg 05 2Lg 5 2Lg LG s String data String data for the specified number of characters s 5s 5s 05s S String data String data conversion for the specified number of characters or up to H0 S 5S 5S 05S Note 1 The number of converted digits for the conversion form is up to 16 digits Note 2 Conversion modifier L can also specified in a lower case character Note 3 S upper case letter is support...

Page 722: ...ing can be specified Put zero 0 before the display digit 05x H 12A 0012a 05b H 123 00123 08 3f SF 123 4567 0123 457 010 3e SF 1234 567 01 235e 03 Specification of right align and left align 5d K 100 100 Default is right align To set to left align add minus before the specification of digit number 5x H 12A 12a 5b H 123 123 8 3f SF 123 4567 123 457 010 3e SF 1234 567 1 235e 03 Specification of sign ...

Page 723: ...on form Binary data before conversion ASCII data after conversion Remarks 10 3e SF123 4567 1 235e 02 Exponent is output in at least 2 digits u U1234 1234 For u x or b the existence of a plus sign in the conversion form does not affect the result u U1234 1234 For u x or b the existence of a space in the conversion form does not affect the result u U 1234 1234 For u x or b the existence of a number ...

Page 724: ...s the settings after will be invalid abcdef abcdef Specification of zero padding 010s abcdef 00000abcdef When the setting for the display digit is available zero padding can be specified Put zero 0 before the display digit 010s abcdef abcdef Specification of right align and left align 10s abcdef abcdef Default is left align To set to right align add a minus sign before the specification of the num...

Page 725: ...n to character strings The date and time information to be output is year month day day of the week hour minute and second This instruction can be used when date and time information is required for creating mail texts This instruction is used in combination with the PRINT instruction Processing Converts the date and time information specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it as string data in th...

Page 726: ...in the table below regardless of the conversion pattern of S2 Operand Description Specified range Remarks S1 Year U0 to U99 The character string after conversion is 2000 to 2099 S1 1 Month U1 to U12 S1 2 Day U1 to U31 S1 3 Hours U0 to U23 S1 4 Minutes U0 to U59 S1 5 Seconds U0 to U59 S1 6 Day of the week U0 to U6 14 15 TIMEstr Date and Time Character String Conversion 14 76 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 727: ...byte Alphabet English 6 Day of the week Day Month Year Single byte Number English 7 Note 2 Day of the week Day Month Year Single byte Alphabet English Second digit Date and time Value Description 0 Date and time 1 Date only 2 Time only Third digit Addition of day of the week Value Description 0 No 1 Note 3 Note 4 Yes Fourth digit Delimiter Specify a delimiter for data Value Date Between date and t...

Page 728: ...hh mm ss 05 06 32 H1000 yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 2014 09 05 05 06 32 H1010 yyyy mm dd d hh mm ss 2014 09 05 Fri 05 06 32 H2014 yyyy mm dd d hh mm ss 2014 09 05 5 05 06 32 H3010 yyyy mm dd d hh mm ss 2014 09 05 5 05 06 32 H4000 dd mm yyyy hh mm ss 05 09 2014 05 06 32 H4006 ddmmyyyy_hhmmss 05092014_050632 H4012 d dd mm yyyy hh mm ss Fri 05 09 2014 05 06 32 H4112 d dd mm yyyy Fri 05 09 2014 H5000 dd mm yy...

Page 729: ...When specifying 2 for the third digit which is for the specification of date and time the specification of addition of the day of the week is processed as 0 No Note 5 When specifying a value other than 0 to 3 for the fourth digit of the output pattern it is processed as the value 5 Example of processing Example 1 U 14 SD50 SD51 SD52 DT10 U 9 U 25 U23 No of bytes S1 SD50 S2 DT0 D DT10 DT11 DT12 DT1...

Page 730: ... 3A H 35 5 Output example Wed 08 06 2020 23 20 05 H 38 8 H 30 0 H 2D H 36 6 H 30 0 H 32 2 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the parameter of S1 is out of the setting range To be set when the parameter of S2 is out of the setting range To be set when the range between S1 to S1 6 is out of the access...

Page 731: ... D F S1 Exampl e 1 Outline of operation This instruction compares the string specified by S1 and the string specified by S2 The comparison result is output to the system relays SRA to SRC assessment flags for the comparison instruction Comparison flags system relays SRA to SRC are processed as follows SRA SRB SRC S1 S2 OFF OFF ON S1 S2 OFF ON OFF S1 S2 ON OFF OFF If the numbers of characters to be...

Page 732: ...RC ON 1 Character count Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the string range specified by S1 or S2 is out of the accessible range SRA Depending on the comparison result SRB SRC 14 16 SCMP String Compare 14 82 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 733: ...ion This instruction combines the string specified by S1 with the string specified by S2 and sets the combined string to the device address specified by D The maximum number of characters for the result is 4096 characters Processing DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 B A D C E 5 No of characters Byte address Higher bytes Lower bytes Example Combine the strings of DT0 and DT10 and set the result to DT20 D...

Page 734: ... To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the string range specified by S1 or S2 is out of the accessible range To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when the connected string exceeds the maximum number of characters 14 17 SADD String Addition 14 84 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 735: ...ine of operation This instruction sets the number of characters stored in the beginning of the character string specified by S to the device address specified by D Processing Example Set the number of characters of DT0 in DT100 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 B A C D 1 E 2 3 8 No of characters Byte address Higher bytes Lower bytes DT100 8 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case o...

Page 736: ...Name Description To be set when the string range specified by S is out of the accessible range 14 18 LEN Obtainment of String Length 14 86 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 737: ...SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction detects a termination character null from a string and acquires the number of characters Null characters are not included in the number of characters Processing Searches the length of the string specified by S1 Searches NULL characters for the number of characters specified by S2 maximum string length from S1 and stores the string length excludi...

Page 738: ...4 3938h Precautions for programming Error flags are not cleared even when normal operation is performed Use ERR instruction for clearing error flags Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the maximum string length specified by S2 is out of the range To be set when the maximum string length specified ...

Page 739: ...odifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction searches the character data specified by S1 from the character string specified by S2 As for the search result the number of the same character data is stored in the device address specified by D and the first matched relative position byte units is stored in D 1 Processi...

Page 740: ...searched for is stored b String table that is searched 1 Character count 2 Number of matching strings 3 Relative position of matching string Note 1 Note 1 Using the low byte of DT11 at the beginning of the string table as a reference the relative position for the low byte of DT12 is calculated as a value 3 based on where it matches with string EF first Precautions for programming For S1 the number...

Page 741: ... the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the number of characters S1 is larger than S2 To be set when the string range specified by S1 or S2 is out of the accessible range 14 20 SSRC String Search WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 91 ...

Page 742: ...ices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction takes out the characters for the number of characters specified by S2 from the right side end of the character data of the character string specified by S1 and stores it in the device...

Page 743: ...to search String table that is searched DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 C S1 DT0 S2 U7 D DT20 Byte address High Low Byte address High Low Precautions for programming The character data of the D area from before performing the operation is overwritten When the number of characters of S2 is greater than the number of characters in the string of S1 the transferal is performed for the number of characte...

Page 744: ...es Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction takes out the characters for the number of characters specified by S2 from the left side beginning of the character data of the character string specified by S1 and stores it in the dev...

Page 745: ... to search DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 DT26 C S1 DT0 S2 U7 D DT20 String table that is searched Byte address High Low Byte address High Low Precautions for programming The character data of the D area from before performing the operation is overwritten When the number of characters of S2 is greater than the number of characters in the string of S1 the transferal is performed for the number of ch...

Page 746: ...sult that is taken out Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 D Outline of operation This instruction takes out data for the number of characters specified by S3 from the position specified by S2 of the character string specified by S1 and stores...

Page 747: ...ters DT20 Byte address High Low Byte address High Low Precautions for programming The character data of the D area from before performing the operation is overwritten When the number of characters of S3 is larger than the number of characters of the S1 string starting from the S2 position the transferal is performed for the number of characters of S1 The S2 position should be specified by a number...

Page 748: ...ta range 0 to 4095 Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D n Outline of operation This instruction takes out data for the number of characters specified by S2 from the character string specified by S1 and transfers it to the position n of the chara...

Page 749: ... DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 DT26 Byte address High Low Transfer destination 5 6 8 7 1 5 Example 2 The number of characters of S2 is larger than the number of characters in the string of S1 D A C B B D C A 4 No of characters DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 Byte address High Low 8 No of characters Byte address High Low Character string Transfer destination after execution DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 DT24 DT25 DT2...

Page 750: ...sent The n position should be specified by a number counted from low order in sequence putting the least significant byte as K0 Byte 0 0 1 2 and so on Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S2 number of characters is out of the range To be set when the number of characters of D is smaller than n 14 24 M...

Page 751: ...Number of characters to be replaced available data range 1 to 4096 Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D p n Outline of operation This instruction replaces the string specified by S with the characters specified by n from the position p in the string...

Page 752: ...Low Transfer destination 5 6 5 1 8 7 Transfer destination after execution As a result the number of characters increases from 8 characters to 10 characters Example 2 The number of characters n is larger than the number of characters in the string S1 as from the position specified by p 5 0 9 D C E B E A 2 4 3 B D C A 5 No of characters DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 Byte address High Low 9 No of chara...

Page 753: ...as from the position specified by p The p position should be specified by a number counted from low order in sequence putting the least significant byte as K0 Byte 0 0 1 2 and so on Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the number of characters string size To be set when the number of characters of D i...

Page 754: ...ecified by S1 in D The character constant specified by S2 is converted to ASCII code the number of characters 1 word is stored in D 1 and the character data converted to ASCII is stored in subsequent areas in sequence from the low byte Character constants should be put between double quotations for specification From 0 to 256 characters can be specified for a character constant When there are doub...

Page 755: ...rs from A to P S1 U256 S2 ABCDEF KLMNOP D DT0 1 Storage area size 2 Character count Example 3 Converting 0 characters of the string repeated double quotation marks S1 U1 S2 D DT0 Note 1 The data that is out of the destination range DT2 to DT7 does not change 1 Storage area size 2 Character count 14 26 ESSET Conversion Character Constant ASCII Code With Storage Area Size WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 105 ...

Page 756: ...securing a storage area large enough to store the area starting with D causes the size to be out of the accessible range To be set when 0 or 65535 is set for S1 To be set when the number of characters is larger than the storage area size 14 26 ESSET Conversion Character Constant ASCII Code With Storage Area Size 14 106 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 757: ...tline of operation This instruction is used for creating texts of mails etc Processing ASCII code texts are created according to the specified text creation form The text creation form can be specified using the operand S1 ESSET instruction or the mail setting screen of FPWIN GR7 Created texts can be connected using the ESADD instruction The maximum size of a mail text is 4096 bytes for sending an...

Page 758: ...form An operation error occurs when it exceeds 16 digits The maximum number of characters after conversion for a single datum excluding s and S is 32 An operation error occurs when it exceeds 32 characters The maximum number of characters for s or S after conversion is 4096 All strings that are not recognized as conversion forms are treated as main texts Example Conversion forms that do not allow ...

Page 759: ...g to the value S2 Image of mail text Floor A 25 C Floor B 28 C S1 Floor A d C nFloor B d C S2 DT100 D DT200 Setting values DT100 K 25 DT101 K 28 DT102 DT201 No of bytes DT202 DT203 DT204 DT205 DT206 DT207 H C2 DT208 DT209 DT210 DT211 DT212 DT213 DT214 DT215 DT216 Data part H 32 2 H 3A H 20 SPACE H 6F o H 6C l U 30 H 43 C H 0A LF H 6C l H 6F o H 20 SPACE H 3A H 32 2 H C2 H 43 C H 35 5 H 20 SPACE H ...

Page 760: ...50 Setting values DT1 U 5 DT2 DT3 DT51 No of bytes DT52 DT53 DT54 DT55 DT56 DT57 H 76 v DT58 DT59 DT60 DT61 Data part H 6e n H 69 i H 63 c H64 d H 72 r U 20 H 6c l H 6d m H 3a H 35 5 H 20 SPACE H 6f o H 74 t H 75 u H 6f o H 50 P H 6f o H 75 u H 65 e H 20 SPACE DT50 Storage area size 1 U 22 DT62 2 Note 1 The start area storage area size for D is set before executing this instruction Note 2 The data...

Page 761: ...a number of digits is not specified for the conversion form the number of converted data and the size of the storage area will vary according to the value S2 Use the ESSET instruction to reset the S2 string data Image of mail text Location Nagoya Aichi S1 Location s s S2 DT1 D DT50 Setting values DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT8 DT9 DT10 DT11 U 5 H 61 a H 6F o H 61 a U 6 H 68 h H 69 i No of bytes Data part H 7...

Page 762: ... H 20 SPACE H 5B H 3A H 61 a H 5B H 2C H 61 a H 6F o H 79 y H 6F o DT1 DT6 DT7 U 10 DT12 Storage area size 1 DT50 U 32 Right aligned H 63 c DT64 H 69 i H 69 i DT65 H 68 h H 20 SPACE DT66 H 20 SPACE H 5D DT67 H 20 SPACE U 10 Left aligned 3 4 Note 1 The start area storage area size for D is set before executing this instruction Note 2 The data out of the destination range does not change Note 3 If s...

Page 763: ...t strings to insert them In the places of conversion forms s and d the ASCII code that is equivalent to the data array specified by S2 is inserted Use the ESSET instruction to reset the S2 string data area Image of mail text Nagoya city 25 C S1 s d C S2 DT1 D DT50 Setting values DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 H 61 a U 6 No of bytes Data part H 4E N DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 DT55 DT56 DT57 DT58 H 61 a H 6F o H 61 a U 1...

Page 764: ...ed 4096 bytes To be set when the conversion form is specified by a real number and conversion data is a non real number To be set when the size specified by the conversion form exceeds 32 characters Excluding the conversion forms s S To be set when the number of characters is larger than the storage area size for S1 and S2 CY SR9 To be set when created texts are larger than the storage area size o...

Page 765: ...tion converts data and time information to character strings The date and time information to be output is year month day day of the week hour minute and second This instruction can be used when date and time information is required for creating mail texts This instruction is used in combination with the EPRINT instruction Processing Converts the date and time information specified by S1 to ASCII ...

Page 766: ...data Refer to the page for the 14 15 TIMEstr Date and Time Character String Conversion instruction Example of processing Example 1 S1 SD50 S2 DT0 D DT10 Output image 2014 09 25 Thu 12 54 31 U 14 SD50 SD51 SD52 DT10 U 9 U 25 U 24 S1 SD50 S2 DT0 D DT10 DT12 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT16 DT17 DT18 DT19 DT20 DT21 DT22 DT23 U 12 SD53 SD54 SD55 U 54 U 31 SD56 U 4 DT0 H 0014 DT11 U 23 Year Month Day Hour Minute Se...

Page 767: ...torage area size and CY is set S1 SD50 S2 DT0 D DT10 Output image 2014 09 25 Thu 12 54 31 U 14 SD50 SD51 SD52 DT10 U 9 U 25 U 16 Storage area size 1 S1 SD50 S2 DT0 D DT10 DT12 DT13 DT14 H 4E94 年 DT15 DT16 H 8E8C 月 DT17 H 35 5 DT18 H FA93 日 DT19 H 32 2 H 96 木 H 28 U 12 SD53 SD54 SD55 U 54 U 31 SD56 U 4 Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Day of the week DT0 H 0014 H 30 0 H 32 2 H 34 4 H 31 1 H 39 9 H...

Page 768: ... 6 range exceeds the accessible range To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range CY SR9 To be set when created character strings are larger than the storage area size for D 14 28 ETIMEstr Date and Time Character String Conversion With Storage Area Size 14 118 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 769: ...e 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction compares the string specified by S1 and the string specified by S2 The comparison result is output to the system relays SRA to SRC assessment flags for the comparison instruction The size of the storage area is not included in the judgment conditions Comparison flags system relays ...

Page 770: ...S2 DT10 SRA OFF SRB OFF SRC ON Example 2 Comparing the string ABCD that is stored in the data register with the character constants ABCDE that are specified for the operand S1 DT0 S2 ABCD SRA OFF SRB ON SRC OFF Example 3 Comparing the NULL characters that are stored in the data register S1 DT0 S2 DT10 SRA OFF SRB ON SRC OFF 14 29 ESCMP String Compare With Storage Area Size 14 120 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12...

Page 771: ...e of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the storage areas specified by S1 and S2 are out of the accessible range To be set when the number of characters is larger than the storage area size for each operand To be set when a data table with a storage area size of 0 or 65535 is specified SRA SRB SRC Depending on the comparison result 14 29 ESCMP String Compare With Sto...

Page 772: ...e 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction combines the string specified by S1 with the string specified by S2 and stores the combined string to the device address specified by D The maximum number of characters for the result is 65534 c...

Page 773: ...cifying with a character constant the maximum is 256 characters A NULL character is processed as one character Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the string range specified by S1 or S2 is out of the accessible range To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when ...

Page 774: ...t rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction stores the number of characters stored in the beginning of the character string specified by S to the device address specified by D A NULL character is processed as one character Processing Stores the number of characters in a character string that are stored a...

Page 775: ...dex modification To be set when the string range specified by S is out of the accessible range To be set when the number of characters is larger than the storage area size for S To be set when a data table with a storage area size of 0 or 65535 is specified 14 31 ELEN Obtainment of String Length With Storage Area Size WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 125 ...

Page 776: ... g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 p S2 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction searches for the string data specified by S1 in the string table starting from S2 For p specify the relative position by byte in the string table wh...

Page 777: ...on where it matches with string EFG Example 2 When the string EF being searched for is found in two locations on the string table after DT10 S1 DT0 p U1 S2 DT10 S2 DT120 Note 1 Using the low byte of DT12 at the beginning of the string table as a reference the relative position for the low byte of DT13 is calculated as a value 3 based on where it matches with string EF first Example 3 Searching for...

Page 778: ...arched for When 2 is specified for the number of characters the string AB is searched for 1 Storage area size 2 Character count The number of data for search results is the number of matches that occurred from the starting search position to the end of the data table The relative position where the search results match is the number of bytes from the start of the data table to where the search res...

Page 779: ...e set when p is larger than the number of characters of S2 To be set when the string range specified by S1 or S2 is out of the accessible range To be set when the number of characters is larger than the storage area size for S1 and S2 To be set when a data table with a storage area size of 0 or 65535 is specified 14 32 ESSRC String Search With Storage Area Size WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 14 129 ...

Page 780: ...s and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction takes out the characters for the number specified for S2 from the right side end of the character data of the string specified by S1 and stores them as string data in the device whose address is specified by D The number of bytes of string data that are taken out is stored in D 1 F...

Page 781: ...he string that is stored in S1 The number of characters that is stored in S1 is taken out and stored in D S1 DT0 S2 U7 S2 DT20 Note 1 The data that is out of the destination range starting from the high byte of DT23 and ending with DT26 does not change Example 3 When the number of characters that were taken out exceeds the storage area size for D Only the amount of characters that can be stored in...

Page 782: ...nstant the maximum is 256 characters When specifying an empty string for S1 the result is always 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when S2 number of characters is out of the range To be set when the number of characters is larger tha...

Page 783: ...ices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction takes out characters as specified by S2 from the left side start of the character data of the string specified by S1 and stores them as string data with storage area in the device address specified by D The number of bytes of string data that are taken out is stored in D 1 For b...

Page 784: ...the string that is stored in S1 The number of characters that is stored in S1 is taken out and stored in D S1 DT0 S2 U7 S2 DT20 Note 1 The data that is out of the destination range starting from the high byte of DT23 and ending with DT26 does not change Example 3 When the number of characters that were taken out exceeds the storage area size for D Only the amount of characters that can be stored i...

Page 785: ...onstant the maximum is 256 characters When specifying an empty string for S1 the result is always 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when S2 number of characters is out of the range To be set when the number of characters is larger th...

Page 786: ...x modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction takes out data for the number of characters specified by S3 from the string data specified by S1 and stores them as string data with a storage area in the...

Page 787: ...er of characters specified for S3 is larger than the number of characters for the string that is stored in S1 after S2 Take out the three characters 123 which come after the 5th character of S2 and store them in D S1 DT0 S2 U5 S3 U5 D DT20 Note 1 The data that is out of the destination range starting from the high byte of DT23 and ending with DT26 does not change Example 3 When the number of chara...

Page 788: ...ral is performed for the storage area size of D When specifying with a character constant the maximum is 256 characters When specifying an empty string for S1 the result is always 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when the number of ...

Page 789: ...in g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction takes out data for the number of characters specified by S2 from the character string specified by S1 and transfers it to the position n of the ch...

Page 790: ...ndicates that the number of characters specified for S2 is larger than the number of characters for the string that is stored in S1 S1 DT0 S2 U5 D DT20 n U1 Note 1 The data for DT26 that is out of the destination range does not change Example 3 When the number of characters that were taken out exceeds the storage area size for D Only the amount of characters that can be stored in D starting from t...

Page 791: ...ze of D the transferal is performed for the storage area size of D When specifying with a character constant the maximum is 256 characters When specifying an empty string for S1 the result is always 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S2 number of characters is out of the range To be set when the n...

Page 792: ...Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D p n Note 1 Only 16 bit devices and integer constants can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction replaces the string specified by D with the string specified by S For p specify the relative position in D where the string...

Page 793: ...om the DT0 string to transfer them to the 4th byte 5th character of the DT20 string This indicates that the number of characters specified for n is larger than the number of characters for the string that is stored in S1 S DT0 D DT20 p U4 n U8 Example 3 When the number of characters that were taken out exceeds the storage area size for D Only the amount of characters that can be stored in D starti...

Page 794: ...aximum is 256 characters When specifying an empty string for S1 the result is always 0 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when S number of characters is out of the range To be set when the number of characters of D is smaller than n To be set when the position of p is larger than the number of characters...

Page 795: ...PRECV General Purpose Communication Receive Instruction 15 15 15 4 SEND MEWTOCOL Master MODBUS Master 15 21 15 5 RECV MEWTOCOL Master MODBUS Master 15 29 15 6 SEND MODBUS Master Function Code Specification 15 37 15 7 RECV MODBUS Master Function Code Specification 15 44 15 8 PMSET pPMSET Change of SCU Parameters 15 51 15 9 PMGET Acquiring SCU Parameters 15 58 15 10 CONFIG Change Configuration 15 65...

Page 796: ... SMTPcBDY SMTPcBRD SMTPcSV SMTPcADD SMTPcSET SMTPcREQ SMTPcCTL EIPNDST EIPSTART EIPSTOP EIP_IN EIP_OT In the case of a CPU with built in SCU specify a slot number U0 for S1 and a COM port number for S2 In the case of a CPU with built in ET LAN specify a slot number U100 for S1 and a connection number for S2 In the case of a serial communication unit specify a slot number U1 to 16 for S1 and a COM ...

Page 797: ...1 to U4 Note 1 CPU unit Ver 3 and later is required to use connection numbers U17 to U216 for a CPU unit with built in ET LAN In addition the number of user connections must also be changed in tool software FPWIN GR7 Configuration Built in ET LAN Add on Program example UNITSEL U 0 U 2 S2 R0 S1 Example 1 Specify COM2 for SCU with built in CPU in Slot 0 UNITSEL U 100 U 5 S2 R0 S1 Example 2 Specify U...

Page 798: ... that S1 U0 CPU unit with built in SCU and S2 U1 port number 1 are specified by the UNITSEL instruction Available operation units Available Operatio n unit bit US SS UL SL SF DF i Note 1 When a negative value is specified for operand n it is necessary to specify an SS operation unit 15 2 GPTRNS pGPSEND GPSEND General Purpose Communication Send Instruction 15 4 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 799: ...s Data of n bytes are sent from the unit communication port set by the UNITSEL instruction starting with the starting address word address of the sent data area specified by S Data to be sent are set by the user program in the area starting with S The processing result is stored in the area specified by D Processing The slot numbers and communication port numbers specified with UNITSEL instruction...

Page 800: ...structions GPSEND The data send confirmation process is performed in the operation processing for the GPSEND instruction Note 2 Adv anta ge Data can be sent to different COM ports and connections simultaneously without limit Disa dvan tage It is necessary to turn ON the execution condition of the GPSEND instruction until the end of data sending and turn OFF the execution condition at a scan in whi...

Page 801: ...end code are not distinguished It is not automatically added Note 1 For SCU up to 4096 bytes can be sent including a start code and an end code The start code and end code are set from the configuration menu of the tool software or with the PMSET instruction When Start code STX is set to Enabled the maximum amount of sent data that can be specified is decremented by one When Terminator setting is ...

Page 802: ...dergoing transmission it results in no operation No error occurs Sending zero byte data results in an error For a GPTRNS instruction and a pGPSEND instruction up to 16 instructions can be executed simultaneously for different COM ports and connections The total of simultaneous usage of SEND RECV GPTRNS pGPSEND and pPMSET instructions The GPTRNS pGPSEND and GPSEND instructions are not available in ...

Page 803: ... port number U1 In the GPTRNS pGPSEND GPSEND instruction specify and execute the start of the table that stores the message to be sent DT101 and the number of characters in the data DT100 GPTRNS instruction R0 DF SSET DT100 ABCDE R100 R100 UNITSEL U1 U0 GPTRNS US DT101 DT0 DT100 X8 Y8 GPTRNS execution conditions X8 Clear to send flag ON Y8 Send active flag OFF Communication port settings S1 Slot 0...

Page 804: ...ed Time chart in the case of SCU Data are sent in ascending order from low bytes of S 1 in the table specified by the GPTRNS pGPSEND GPSEND instruction During sending the general purpose communication sending flags Y8 Y9 YA YB are turned ON They turn OFF when sending is completed The sending result 0 normal completion 1 abnormal completion is stored in the general purpose communication sent flags ...

Page 805: ...4 X8 X9 XA XB General purpose communication clear to send flag Turns ON when the unit is set to the general purpose communication mode Y8 Y9 YA YB General purpose communication sending flag Turns ON when sending with general purpose communication mode Turns OFF when the sending process is completed Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Sent flag Reports completion result of sending data in genera purpose communication or m...

Page 806: ...esult code DT0 Data conversion S1 Sent data S2 Sent data storage DT100 Number of sent characters DT101 and after Sent data GPTRNS execution conditions reset S1 S2 S n D S1 S2 R100 RST R100 SET Communication port settings S1 CPU LAN port U100 S2 Connection 1 U1 GPSEND instruction R0 SSET DT100 ABCDE R100 R100 R100 UNITSEL U1 U100 GPSEND US DT101 DT0 DT100 X80 Y80 GPSEND execution conditions X80 Cle...

Page 807: ...eck that the flag is ON Sending flag Y80 Y8F While sending ON When sending done and instruction executed OFF I O allocation in the case of CPU with built in ET LAN I O number Name Description X80 to X8F General purpose communication clear to send flag Turns ON when general purpose communication is in a connected status Y80 to Y8F General purpose communication sending flag Turns ON when sending wit...

Page 808: ... exceeds the area When the number of sent data specified by n is 0 The volume including a start code and an end code exceeds the specified maximum value When the number of sent data specified by n exceeds the data area Either 0 or a negative value is set for N in the settings of sending to ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program 15 2 GPTRNS pGPSEND GPSEND General Purpose Communication Sen...

Page 809: ... 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D1 Note 1 D2 Note 1 Note 1 Always 16 bit data device regardless of the specification of operation units i Outline of operation This instruction reads data that is sent from an external device and received by the communication port of the unit This instruction reads ...

Page 810: ...ator setting is set to ETX or CR the maximum amount of sent data is decremented by one When Terminator setting is set to CR LF the maximum amount of sent data is decremented by two When Terminator setting is set to Time the maximum amount of sent data is not decremented Storage method for received data Received data are stored in ascending order from lower bytes DT200 H32 2 H31 1 H34 4 H33 3 H35 5...

Page 811: ...vice are stored in the receive buffer When the end code is received the received flag X0 X1 X2 X3 turns ON Subsequently the following data are stored in the buffers upon reception Data for 8 buffers can be received consecutively Start receiving 1 Received data Reception done flag X0 2 5 A C R ON OFF ON OFF GPRECV execution condition R100 Execute GPRECV instruction B When the GPRECV instruction is ...

Page 812: ...multiplex reception is in progress the received flag remains ON after the received data have been copied using the GPRECV instruction The received data cannot be copied at the leading edge of the reception done signal The received data copied by the GPRECV instruction do not include a start code or an end code It is also possible to receive binary data using the GPRECV instruction In this case tim...

Page 813: ...a are received the received flag X70 to X7F turns ON When the GPRECV instruction is executed data are copied to the specified area and the received flags X70 to X7F are turned OFF The received flags X70 to X7F are turned OFF when I O refresh is executed at the start of the following scans Execute GPRECV Reception done flag X70 X7F Reception done flag X70 X7F Reception done ON Received data copy do...

Page 814: ...or the CPU with built in ET LAN Refer to the section describing the case of SCU Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range An SCU or ET LAN unit does not exist in the slot specified by UNITSEL The communication mode of the communication port specified wi...

Page 815: ...der data area n Amount of sent data D1 Partner station number D2 Starting address of the device in the receiver data area of the partner unit D3 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI ...

Page 816: ...nu of the tool software FPWIN GR7 When the SEND instruction is executed data are read from the device in the master unit starting with S and stored in the address starting with D2 of the partner unit The transfer method register transfer bit transfer varies according to the device types that are specified by S and D2 The amount of sent data n is specified in words for the register transfer and in ...

Page 817: ...m the destination Note 2 For connection between FP7 and FP7 specify 1 Destination is determined by the IP address Specification of destination address D2 Transfer method Communication Mode Address range Register transfer MEWTOCOL COM 0 to 99999 MEWTOCOL DAT 0 to 65535F MODBUS 0 to 65535 H FFFF Bit transfer MEWTOCOL COM 0 to 999F MEWTOCOL DAT 0 to 65535 H FFFF MODBUS 0 to 65535 H FFFF Note 1 When t...

Page 818: ...ruction specify the slot number U0 and the COM port number U1 In the SEND instruction specify and execute the source s starting address DT100 and data amount U2 the destination s station number U1 and starting address DT400 R0 R100 UNITSEL U0 U1 SEND US DT0 U1 DT400 DT100 U2 R100 SEND execution Settings for the communication port S1 Slot 0 U0 S2 COM1 U1 SEND execution conditions Clear to send flag...

Page 819: ...ommunication or master communication Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program I O allocation in the case of Serial Communication Unit COM Port No Name Description 1 2 3 4 XC XD XE XF Master communication clear to send flag Turns ON when MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL7 or MODBUS RTU is set for the communica...

Page 820: ...ice After it is confirmed that connection 1 is established in master mode X90 and no transmissions are currently being executed for the same port Y90 the SEND instruction is started The UNITSEL instruction is used to specify a slot number LAN port U100 and the connection number U1 In the SEND instruction specify and execute the source s starting address DT100 and data amount U2 the destination s s...

Page 821: ...in genera purpose communication or master communication Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program Precautions during programming in the case of CPU with built in ET LAN Use the UNITSEL instruction immediately before the SEND RECV instruction to specify a target connection number for communication M...

Page 822: ...ange is outside the accessible range COM port or connection specified by UNITSEL does not exist or communication is not possible in the specified connection Data device specified by S is invalid or exceeds the area Sent data amount specified by n is invalid Station number specified by D1 is out of the range Data device specified by D2 is invalid or exceeds the area Result storage device specified ...

Page 823: ... partner unit n Number of received data D1 Starting address of the device in the receiver data area of the master unit D2 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K ...

Page 824: ...nstruction is executed the data is read from the address that starts with S2 in the partner station number S1 and the data is stored in the area that starts with D1 in the master unit Depending on the type of device specified by S2 and D1 the transfer method register transfer bit transfer varies The amount of received data n is specified in words for the register transfer and in the number of bits...

Page 825: ...Command 2 is used for WX Command 3 is used for reading DT Command 4 is used for reading WL and LD Bit transfer Note 2 MEWTOCOL COM Fixed to 1 bit During MEWTOCOL COM RCS command is used MEWTOCOL DAT Fixed to 1 bit During MEWTOCOL DAT read contact information 53H is used MODBUS 1 to 2040 bits Command 1 is used for reading Y and R Command 2 is used for X Note 1 When 16 bit devices are specified for ...

Page 826: ...the UNITSEL instruction specify the slot number U0 and the COM port number U1 In the RECV instruction specify and execute the partner station number U1 starting address DT400 data amount U2 and PLC s starting address to store the data DT100 R0 Master communication clear to send flag R100 UNITSEL U0 U1 RECV US DT0 U2 DT100 U1 DT400 XC YC Master communication sending flag R100 RECV execution Setting...

Page 827: ...ommunication or master communication Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program I O allocation in the case of Serial Communication Unit COM Port No Name Description 1 2 3 4 XC XD XE XF Master communication clear to send flag Turns ON when MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL7 or MODBUS RTU is set for the communica...

Page 828: ...T101 of the PLC After it is confirmed that connection 1 is established in master mode X90 and no transmissions are currently being executed for the same port Y90 the RECV instruction is started The UNITSEL instruction is used to specify a slot number LAN port U100 and the connection number U1 In the RECV instruction specify and execute the partner station number U1 starting address DT400 data amou...

Page 829: ...in genera purpose communication or master communication Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program Precautions during programming in the case of CPU with built in ET LAN Use the UNITSEL instruction immediately before the SEND RECV instruction to specify a target connection number for communication M...

Page 830: ...sible range COM port or connection specified by UNITSEL does not exist or communication is not possible in the specified connection Partner station number specified by S1 is out of the range Partner unit sender data device specified by S2 is invalid Sent data amount specified by n is invalid Data device of the receiver data area in the master unit specified by D1 is invalid or exceeds the area Res...

Page 831: ...used and the partner station number Higher byte MODBUS function code two hexadecimal digits H5 H6 HF H10 Lower byte Partner station number two hexadecimal digits H0 to HFF 0 to 255 D2 MODBUS starting address of the receiver data area of the partner unit H0 to HFFFF 0 to 65535 D3 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devic...

Page 832: ...ion mode in the configuration menu of the tool software FPWIN GR7 Specify the MODBUS command to be used and the partner MODBUS station number in a Hex format in D1 When the SEND instruction is executed data are read from the device in the master unit starting with S and stored in the address starting with D2 of the partner unit The transfer method register transfer bit transfer and the type of MOD...

Page 833: ...communication port is being used in the slave communication H8001 Function code error H3 The number of master communication instructions simultaneously used is exceeded H8002 Device number error out of range H4 Transmission timeout H8003 Device quantity error out of range H5 Response reception timeout Note 1 It occurs when an abnormal telegram is received When there is a format error in the header...

Page 834: ...n sending flag DF S1 S2 S n D1 D2 D3 Note 1 Operand D1 of SEND instruction is specified by combining two hexadecimal digits of MODBUS function code with two hexadecimal digits of partner device station number When the MODBUS function code is 16 D1 H10 should be specified Note 2 When the partner device is FP series PLC Operand D2 of SEND instruction can be specified using the device number Time cha...

Page 835: ...escription 1 2 3 4 XC XD XE XF Master communication clear to send flag Turns ON when MEWTOCOL COM MEWTOCOL7 or MODBUS RTU is set for the communication mode and the unit is in the RUN mode YC YD YE YF Master communication sending flag Turns ON during sending data based on SEND RECV instruction Turns OFF when the sending process is completed Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Sent flag Reports completion result of sending...

Page 836: ...rtner station number H01 and starting address H0 Check addresses of connected devices in the instruction manuals of devices R0 R100 UNITSEL U100 U1 SEND US DT0 H1001 H0 DT100 U2 R100 SEND execution relay Settings for the communication port S1 CPU LAN port U100 S2 Connection 1 U1 SEND execution conditions Clear to send flag ON Sending flag OFF SEND instruction execution S Data storage area DT100 n ...

Page 837: ...uted for the connection for which the master communication is in progress Confirm that the master communication sending flags Y90 to Y9F are OFF and execute the instruction The SEND or RECV instruction cannot be executed for the connection for which the slave communication is in progress Up to 16 SEND RECV instructions can be executed simultaneously for differing connections In the MODBUS TCP mode...

Page 838: ...Lower byte Partner station number two hexadecimal digits H1 to HFF 1 to 255 S2 MODBUS starting address of the sender in the partner unit H0 to HFFFF 0 to 65535 n Number of received data 1 to 127 words 1 to 2040 bits D1 Device starting address of the receiver data area in the master unit D2 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available...

Page 839: ...BUS address in a Hex format in S1 When the RECV instruction is executed data are read from the address starting with S2 in the partner unit and stored in the area starting with D1 in the master unit The transfer method register transfer bit transfer and the MODBUS function code that can be used vary depending on the type of device specified by D1 The amount of received data n is specified in words...

Page 840: ...d a response reception timeout occurs Note 2 It occurs when the communication control I O relays corresponding to the communication port master communication clear to send flag master communication send active flag master communication send done result relay are not allocated as I O words of the CPU unit in the I O map It occurs only when the number of user connections of ET LAN is expanded and th...

Page 841: ...ecified using the device number Time chart in the case of SCU Checks that the flag is OFF RECV execution Master communication sending flag YC YD YE YF Master communication sent flag Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Data sending Response reception processing Master communication clear to send flag XC XD XE XF Checks that the flag is ON RECV Instruction executable conditions Clear to send flag XC XD XE XF ON Sending fla...

Page 842: ...letion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program Precautions during programming in the case of SCU Use the UNITSEL instruction immediately before the SEND RECV instruction to specify a target port for communication Master communication is only enabled when MEWTOCOL or MODBUS is selected Confirm that the master commu...

Page 843: ...n Data amount U2 D1 Data storage area DT100 D2 Execution result code DT0 DF S1 S2 S1 S2 n D1 D2 Time chart in the case of CPU with built in ET LAN Execute RECV Master communication sending flag Y90 Y9F Master communication sent flag Y70 Y7F Sending data Response reception processing Master communication clear to send flag X90 X9F Check that the flag is ON RECV instruction executable conditions Cle...

Page 844: ...The SEND or RECV instruction cannot be executed for the connection for which the slave communication is in progress Up to 16 SEND RECV instructions can be executed simultaneously for differing connections In the MODBUS TCP mode specify the partner station number as operand for the SEND RECV instruction Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect ac...

Page 845: ... T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Outline of operation Communication parameters of the COM port of the unit is changed with a user program Set communication parameters to be changed within n words from the area starting with S and execute the PMSET pPMSET instruction to issue the setting change request to the unit While the requested change is being processed bit 15 of the proc...

Page 846: ...s checked during the operation processing of the PMSET instruction Note 1 Adv anta ge The PMSET instruction can be executed without any restrictions for different COM ports Disa dvan tage It is necessary to turn ON the execution condition of the PMSET instruction until the end of processing and turn OFF the execution condition at a scan in which the end of data transmission is confirmed pPMSET Not...

Page 847: ...to continue or stop the PLC link 0 The PLC link stops when a communication error occurs 1 The PLC link continues even when a communication error occurs bit 1 to 15 Reserved Note 1 RS CS can be selected only when a 1 channel 5 wire communication cassette product number AFP7CCS2 is used Note 2 The modem is initialized when the power is on PMSET pPMSET instruction is executed and the RUN mode is turn...

Page 848: ...gress flag of bit 15 is zero bit no 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 7 0 Process done 1 In progress Process in progress flag 0 Normal completion 1 The communication port specified by UNITSEL instruction is invalid 2 Setting error 3 Mode change error 4 Communication port occupied 5 Change request parameter inconsistency At the start end of the setting process parameters specified by operands are inconsistent 6 1...

Page 849: ...is program sets 12 words of communication parameters for COM1 port of CPU with built in SCU which are stored in the area starting with Data Register DT0 The processing result is stored in DT100 For the pPMSET instruction when the execution condition arises the parameter change processing is performed only once Program example 3 PMSET instruction specification by PLC link parameter This program set...

Page 850: ...n option Link area block number PLC link W0 maximum station number Range of link relays Range of link registers Link relay sending start number Size of link relay send area Link register sending start number Size of link register send area Reserved area Reserved area Reserved area Reserved area U 0 U 0 U 0 U 0 U 9 U 1 U 5 U 1 U 1 U 0 U 0 U 0 DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 DT10 DT11 U 0 U ...

Page 851: ...o set the parameters is invalid To be set when the number of words specified by n is out of the available range To be set when the device specified for D to store the processing result is invalid 15 8 PMSET pPMSET Change of SCU Parameters WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 15 57 ...

Page 852: ...on parameter monitor information Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction reads the parameters of the COM port of the unit and stores them in the area starting with D Specify the type of acquired data in S Precautio...

Page 853: ...6 19200 U7 38400 U8 57600 U9 115200 U10 230400 bps D 3 Data length setting U0 U1 U0 7 bit length U1 8 bit length D 4 Parity setting U0 to U2 U0 No parity U1 Odd parity U2 Even parity U3 Parity fixed to 0 D 5 Stop bit length setting U0 U1 U0 1 bit U1 2 bits D 6 RS CS enabled or disabled Note 1 U0 U1 U0 Disable U1 Enable D 7 Send waiting time U0 to 10000 U0 Immediate Effective time Un x 0 01 ms 0 to...

Page 854: ...ved area for system Note 1 RS CS can be selected only when an RS 232C 5 wire x 1 channel communication cassette product number AFP7CCS2 is used Note 2 The modem is initialized at the time of setting when the power is on PMGET instruction is executed or switching to the RUN mode Initialization is executed only in the first session Excluding when the power supply is turned off and then on again Note...

Page 855: ...te Initialization failed When modem initialization is completed the operation mode automatically returns to its original state Acquired data PLC link status flag information When S 2 Storage locatio n Items Range Description D Master unit number U1 to U999 U1 to U999 MEWTOCOL COM U1 to U99 MEWTOCOL7 COM U1 to U999 MODBUS RTU U1 to U247 PLC link U1 to U16 Default 0 D 1 Error flag 1 H0000 to H00DF B...

Page 856: ...0 to H00FF Bit 0 Station number 1 0 Normal 1 Error Bit 15 Station number 16 0 Normal 1 Error D 7 Area overlap flag H0000 to H00FF Bit 0 Station number 1 0 Normal 1 Area overlap occurs Position of partner unit is ON Bit 15 Station number 16 0 Normal 1 Area overlap occurs Position of partner unit is ON Acquired data PLC link error frequency information When S 3 Storage locatio n Items Range Descript...

Page 857: ... number of the master unit HFFFF Other units D 1 PLC link W0 maximum station number U2 to U16 Values out of the range are handled as 16 D 2 Range of link relays U0 to U64 Specify the range of link relays used for communication specification by number of words relative values within the specified block D 3 Range of link registers U0 to U128 Specify the range of link registers used for communication...

Page 858: ...ange of link registers D 3 D 15 D 171 D 183 Link relay sending start number D 4 D 16 D 172 D 184 Size of link relay send area D 5 D 17 D 173 D 185 Link register sending start number D 6 D 18 D 174 D 186 Size of link register send area D 7 D 19 D 175 D 187 Reserved for system D 8 to D 11 D 20 to D 23 D 176 to D 179 D 188 to D 191 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Out of range in indirect ...

Page 859: ...rom another FP series PLC This function is compatible with FP2SH This instruction can be used for an FP7 CPU unit with built in SCU built in ET LAN or Serial Communication Unit Specify whether to assign data to FL0 or to the device number DT LD of the FP7 CPU unit if FL is specified by the partner device for MEWTOCOL COM or MEWTOCOL DAT communication When TCP NODELAY is specified for S1 Possible t...

Page 860: ...at the IP address establishment flag X62 is turned OFF Example of program for enabling TCP NODELAY option Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the device specified by S1 exceeds the area To be set when the device specified by S2 exceeds the area To be set when a keyword that is not expected is specified To be set when the device corresponding to FL0 specified by S2 exceeds th...

Page 861: ... Unit Is Used 16 6 16 3 PMGET Acquiring MEWNET W Parameters 16 10 16 4 PMGET Acquiring MEWNET W2 Parameters 16 14 16 5 PMGET Acquiring MEWNET F Parameters 16 18 16 6 PMSET pPMSET Change of MEWNET W Parameters 16 20 16 7 PMSET pPMSET Change of MEWNET W2 Parameters 16 23 16 8 ERR When FP7 Multi wire Link Unit Is Used 16 27 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 16 1 ...

Page 862: ... station number D2 Starting address of the device in the receiver data area of the partner unit D3 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D1 D2 No...

Page 863: ...gister transfer W mode 1 to 55 words W2 mode 1 to 1020 words Bit transfer W mode Fixed at 1 bit W2 mode Fixed at 1 bit Note 1 The transfer method varies according to the device type specified for operands S and D2 The register transfer is used for 16 bit devices and the bit transfer is used for 1 bit devices Devices specified for S and D2 Transfer method 16 bit device WX WY WR WL DT LD Register tr...

Page 864: ...Data error H23 The unit number duplicate error occurs H91 Missing expansion slave unit error Note 1 It occurs when an abnormal telegram is received When there is a format error in the header of an individual protocol the communication discards the received data and a response reception timeout occurs Note 2 It occurs when the communication control I O relays corresponding to the communication port...

Page 865: ...oes not exist To be set when the data device specified by S is incorrect or exceeds the area To be set when the amount of sent data specified by n is incorrect To be set when the station number that is specified by D1 is out of the range To be set when the data device specified by D2 is incorrect or exceeds the area To be set when the result storing device that is specified by D3 is incorrect To b...

Page 866: ...artner unit n Number of received data D1 Starting address of the device in the receiver data area of the master unit D2 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ ...

Page 867: ...o 32 W2 mode 1 to 64 Specify the starting address S2 of the sender data area Transfer method Communication Mode Address range Register transfer W mode 0 to 65535 W2 mode Bit transfer W mode 0 to 65535F W2 mode Note 1 The transfer method varies according to the device type specified for operands S2 and D1 The register transfer is used for 16 bit devices and the bit transfer is used for 1 bit device...

Page 868: ... buffer is being used H9 Master unit station number unset error H41 Format error H21 NACK H60 Parameter error H22 WACK H61 Data error H23 The unit number duplicate error occurs H91 Missing expansion slave unit error Note 1 It occurs when an abnormal telegram is received When there is a format error in the header of an individual protocol the communication discards the received data and a response ...

Page 869: ...the FP7 multi wire link unit that is specified by UNITSEL does not exist To be set when the partner unit station number that is specified by S1 is out of the range To be set when the source data device of the partner unit specified by S2 is incorrect To be set when the amount of sent data specified by n is incorrect To be set when the data device in the receiver data area in the master unit specif...

Page 870: ...nteger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation Monitor information showing the communication state and PLC link operation can be acquired The MEWNET W communication parameters of the FP7 multi wire link unit are read and stored in the area that starts with D Specify the type of acquired data in S Precau...

Page 871: ...5 Unit number 1 to unit number 16 OFF PROG mode ON RUN mode Acquired data network participation state When S 1 Storage location Items Range Description D Number of units added to the link U0 to U32 The number of units added to the link is stored The value is 0 when the existing unit in the network is only one or a station number is being changed D 1 Link participation unit flag Unit nos 1 to 16 H0...

Page 872: ...d data end code D 13 Number of occurrences of received data format error D 14 Number of occurrences of received data NOT support error Acquired data PLC link refresh operation monitoring information When S 3 Storage locatio n Items Range Description D RING counter for the number of receptions U0 to U65535 The number of receptions is stored When the value exceeds 65535 it returns to 0 D 1 Current r...

Page 873: ... index modification pointer access To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when the FP7 multi wire link unit does not exist in the slot that is specified by UNITSEL To be set when the COM port specified by UNITSEL does not exist To be set when the parameter storing device that is specified by D is invalid 16 3 PMGET Acquiring MEWNET W Parameters WUME FP7CPUPG...

Page 874: ...eger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation Monitor information showing the communication state and PLC link operation can be acquired The MEWNET W2 communication parameters of the FP7 multi wire link unit are read and stored in the area that starts with D Specify the type of acquired data in S Precaut...

Page 875: ...N Note 1 Even when 3 has been set for the PLC link operation state flag in the configuration W2 link unit setting of the tool software the data of 6 words is read by the PMGET instruction Acquired data network participation state When S 1 Storage location Items Range Description D Number of units added to the link U0 to U64 The number of units added to the link is stored The value is 0 when the ex...

Page 876: ...error When an error occurs D 7 Number of occurrences of send WACK error When occurred 16 times continuously D 8 Number of occurrences of non response When an error occurs D 9 Number of occurrences of non response At the time of third retry D 10 Number of receptions of undefined commands D 11 Number of occurrences of receive parity check error D 12 Number of occurrences of END CODE reception error ...

Page 877: ...ory of error occurrence state parameter of D 2 D 4 Error occurrence state history area 3 History of error occurrence state parameter of D 3 D 5 Error occurrence state history area 4 History of error occurrence state parameter of D 4 D 6 Error occurrence state history area 5 History of error occurrence state parameter of D 5 D 7 Error occurrence state history area 6 History of error occurrence stat...

Page 878: ...x modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation Monitor information showing the communication state can be acquired MEWNET F communication parameters of the FP7 multi wire link unit are read and stored in the area that starts with D Specify the type of acquired data in S Precautions for programming Describe the UNITSEL instruction immed...

Page 879: ...t value Bit 0 to bit 31 Unit number 1 to unit number 32 OFF Normal unit ON Abnormal unit D 4 to D 5 Abnormal unit cumulative value D 6 to D 7 Setting of slave unit where I O verification error occurred D 8 to D 9 Slave unit where instantaneous power failure occurred Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification pointer acces...

Page 880: ... Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Outline of operation The MEWNET W communication parameters of the FP7 multi wire link unit are changed with a user program Set communication parameters to be changed within n words from the area starting with ...

Page 881: ...uction until the end of processing and turn OFF the execution condition at a scan in which the end of data transmission is confirmed pPMSET Note 1 The processing result is checked at the end of a scan Note 1 Adv anta ge The parameter change processing is performed only once by turning on the execution condition at the time of data send Disa dvan tage Up to 16 send operations can be performed simul...

Page 882: ...ecified by UNITSEL instruction is invalid 2 Setting error 3 Mode change error 4 Communication port occupied 5 Change request parameter inconsistency At the start end of the setting process parameters specified by operands are inconsistent 7 Unit number setting on the front panel of the multi wire link unit When the switch is not 0 Execution result code Execution result flag 0 Normal completion 1 A...

Page 883: ...ces Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Outline of operation The MEWNET W2 communication parameters of the FP7 multi wire link unit are changed with a user program Set communication parameters to be changed within n words from the area starting with S and execute ...

Page 884: ... dvan tage It is necessary to turn ON the execution condition of the PMSET instruction until the end of processing and turn OFF the execution condition at a scan in which the end of data transmission is confirmed pPMSET Note 1 The processing result is checked at the end of a scan Note 1 Adv anta ge The parameter change processing is performed only once by turning on the execution condition at the ...

Page 885: ...d that is stored in the area that starts with the data register DT0 is set in the FP7 multi wire link unit in slot number 1 The processing result is stored in DT100 For the PMSET instruction it is necessary to turn ON the execution condition of the PMSET instruction until the end of processing and turn OFF the execution condition at a scan in which the end of data transmission is confirmed Program...

Page 886: ...oes not exist in the slot that is specified by UNITSEL To be set when the device specified by S is out of the range To be set when the number of words specified by n is out of the available range To be set when the instruction is executed in an interrupt program and the FP7 multi wire link unit is the target 16 7 PMSET pPMSET Change of MEWNET W2 Parameters 16 26 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 887: ...TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F n Outline of operation When the ERR instruction is executed with n set to U0 the instruction operates as follows Clears errors in the FP7 multi wire link unit Resets the values of the system relays and the system data registers in the table shown below Device No Application SR50 FP7 multi wire link unit 1 error SR51 FP7 multi wire link unit 2 error SR52 FP7 multi wire...

Page 888: ...SD93 FP7 multi wire link unit 4 error High order 8 bits Error code Low order 8 bits Unit number SD94 FP7 multi wire link unit 5 error High order 8 bits Error code Low order 8 bits Unit number SD95 FP7 multi wire link unit 6 error High order 8 bits Error code Low order 8 bits Unit number Note 1 Error information can be read by PMGET instruction Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set ...

Page 889: ... 13 FTPcLOG FTP Client Logging Trace Transfer Setting 17 69 17 14 FTPcREQ FTP Client Transfer Request 17 73 17 15 FTPcCTL FTP Client Transfer Control 17 77 17 16 HTTPcSV HTTP Client Connected Server Setting 17 81 17 17 HTTPcSET HTTP Client Transfer Setting 17 87 17 18 HTTPcREQ HTTP Client Transfer Request 17 94 17 19 HTTPcCTL HTTP Client Transfer Control 17 98 17 20 SMTPcBDY Mail Text Setting 17 1...

Page 890: ...2 17 34 CIPMGET CIP Message Data Getting 17 168 17 35 EIPSTART Cyclic Communication Start Request 17 180 17 36 EIPSTOP Cyclic Communication Stop Request 17 183 17 37 EIP_IN EtherNet IP Input Refresh 17 186 17 38 EIP_OT EtherNet IP Output Refresh 17 191 17 39 SEND MC Protocol Master 17 195 17 40 RECV MC Protocol Master 17 201 17 High level Instructions Ethernet Communication 17 2 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 891: ...mmary that indicates the statuses of all connections of ET LAN It describes the UNITSEL instruction immediately before the RDET instruction and specifies the targeted ET LAN port For connection numbers set any value within the range of 1 to 16 The acquired information is converted into integer values in the Hex format in accordance with the relevant allocation and stored in the 7 word area startin...

Page 892: ...ry OPEN status summary and OPEN abnormality status summary Higher word Lower word b15 b9 b8 b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1 5 b1 4 b1 3 b1 2 b1 1 b1 0 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 FTP S U 16 U 15 U 14 U1 3 U 12 U 11 U 10 U 9 U 8 U 7 U 6 U 5 U 4 U 3 U 2 U 1 S 4 S 3 S 2 S 1 Program example All the connection summaries for the built in ET LAN in the CPU unit are acquired and stored in the 7 word area starting ...

Page 893: ... address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a target to be read or a character constant D Starting address of a readout destination device Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This i...

Page 894: ...estination Specify the destination device address to which the state is read out Data to be read and the number of words Data to be read and the number of words vary depending on the combination of S1 and S2 S1 S2 Storage location Name Number of words Forma t Description S1 IPv4 S2 MAC D D 3 Master unit IP address IPv4 4 Decim al Master unit IPv4 address D 4 D 7 Subnet mask IPv4 4 Decim al Subnet ...

Page 895: ...r unit server that is set as the destination Partner unit server to which the connection is established No connection is established 0 TCP server specific partner unit Partner unit client that is allowed to be connected Partner unit client whose connection is established No connection is established 0 TCP server any partner unit Partner unit client that is connected most recently A partner unit cl...

Page 896: ... address 8 Hexad ecimal Destination IP address for IPv6 Note 4 Total number of words 50 S1 Ipv6 S2 CONNECT 1 or CONNECT 2 D D 7 Master unit IP address 1 IPv6 8 Hexad ecimal Master unit IPv6 address Manual setting D 8 D 15 Master unit IP address 2 IPv6 8 Hexad ecimal Home IPv6 address Link local Note 2 D 16 D 23 Master unit IP address 3 IPv6 8 Hexad ecimal Home IPv6 address Router Note 3 D 24 D 31 ...

Page 897: ...r to which the connection is established No connection is established 0 TCP server specific partner unit Partner unit client that is allowed to be connected Partner unit client whose connection is established No connection is established 0 TCP server any partner unit Partner unit client that is connected most recently A partner unit client has never been connected 0 UDP Partner unit that is set as...

Page 898: ...92 168 5 1 DT9 H00A8 U168 DT10 H0005 U5 DT11 H0001 U1 DT12 H0000 This value indicates the type of the IP address For IPv4 the value is 0 DT13 H00C0 U192 The destination IPv4 address is stored Example 192 168 5 11 DT14 H00A8 U168 DT15 H0005 U5 DT16 H000B U11 Example 3 When specifying IPv6 address and the destination IP address of a specified connection The results are stored in the 50 word area tha...

Page 899: ...DT38 H0000 DT39 H0000 DT40 H0001 DT41 H0001 The type of the IP address is stored For IPv6 the value is 1 DT42 HFE80 The destination IPv6 address is stored Example fe80 0011 2233 4455 6677 8899 aabb ccdd DT43 H0011 DT44 H2233 DT45 H4455 DT46 H6677 DT47 H8899 DT48 HAABB DT49 HCCDD Example 4 When specifying IPv6 address and MAC address The results are stored in the 44 word area that starts with D S1 ...

Page 900: ... FF DT42 HCCDD DT43 HEEFF Example 5 When specifying the destination port number for a specified IPv4 connection The results are stored in the 19 word area that starts with D S1 IPv4 S2 CONNECT1 D DT20 Value Description DT20 H00C0 U192 The master unit IPv4 address is stored Example 192 168 5 30 DT21 H00A8 U168 DT22 H0005 U5 DT23 H001E U30 DT24 H00FF U255 The subnet mask is stored Example 255 255 25...

Page 901: ...ally acquire IPv6 address Acquire from router is selected the master unit IPv6 address is stored For manual setting 0 is stored DT24 DT31 When Automatically acquire IPv6 address Acquire from DHCP is selected the master unit IPv6 address is stored For manual setting 0 is stored DT32 H0100 U64 The subnet prefix length is stored Example 64 DT33 HFE80 The IPv6 address of the default gateway is stored ...

Page 902: ...hen the target to be read S2 is set to an item other than MAC CONNECT IDx LOGx IDALL or LOGALL To be set when an unset transfer setting is specified To be set when an unset logging trace transfer setting is specified To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not the built in ET LAN in the CPU unit Set when executed in an interrupt program Note 1 For details of the error codes stored in the s...

Page 903: ...address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a target to be read or a character constant D Starting address of a readout destination device Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This in...

Page 904: ...y Specify 0 to 15 for x with LOGx Note 1 When specifying all transfer numbers Specify IDALL When specifying all loggings Specify LOGALL Note 1 D Read destination Specify the destination device address to which the state is read out Note 1 When HTTPc is specified for S1 neither LOGx nor LOGALL can be specified for S2 If one of them is specified an operation error occurs Data to be read and the numb...

Page 905: ...sfer failed Total number of words 7 3 LOGx LOGALL Note 2 D Control relay Note 3 1 FTPc logging control relay HTTPc logging control relay Mail transmission logging control relay D 1 Execution done code Note 4 1 0 Normal completion An error code is stored at abnormal completion D 2 Transfer done code 1 FTP HTTP SMTP response code Note 5 D 3 D 4 Number of successful executions individual 2 Number of ...

Page 906: ...me DT16 DT17 Number of transfer successes Whole DT18 DT19 Number of transfer failures Whole DT20 ID transfer setting Only the bit for each ID number that is set is turned ON DT21 DT27 Status of ID0 The status data 7 words for each of the 16 IDs is read Control relay 1 word Execution done code 1 word Transfer done code 1 word Number of successful executions individual 2 words Number of failed execu...

Page 907: ...0 During process 1 Instruction execution complete Execution done relay bit 3 0 Normal completion 1 Abnormal completion Execution result relay bit 4 0 Send 1 Receive Transfer direction relay bit 5 4 3 Note 1 The transfer direction relay bit 5 is 0 for logging or an HTTP client Note 2 The transfer cancel request relay bit 14 is 0 for logging or an HTTP client List of execution done codes Code Name D...

Page 908: ... 425 It is not possible to open data connection 426 Connection was closed and data transfer was canceled for some reason 450 It is not possible to execute the request for any reason of access authority or file system 451 Processing was canceled due to a local error 452 It is not possible to execute due to any problem in disk capacity 500 Syntax error of commands 501 Syntax error of arguments or pa...

Page 909: ... destination address is unknown 411 The request without the defined Content Length was rejected 412 The condition given in more than one request header field was judged incorrect in the test on the server 413 The request was rejected because its size is larger than the processible size 414 The request was rejected because its URI is too long List of transfer done codes HTTP error codes Error code ...

Page 910: ...when the read area is out of the range To be set when the read type S1 is set to an item other than IPv4 IPv6 FTPc HTTPc or SMTPc To be set when the target to be read S2 is set to an item other than MAC CONNECT IDx LOGx IDALL or LOGALL To be set when a combination other than the combinations listed in the restrictions on combination is specified for the type S1 and target S2 to be read To be set w...

Page 911: ...eger Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation This instruction configures the IP IPv4 address setting Processing The IPv4 setting parameter for S is stored in the operation work area and the IP address required the subnet mask optional and the gateway optional of the Ethernet unit are initialized Values sp...

Page 912: ...Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number If the IP address setting is changed during communication the process in progress will fail Execute this instruction only once at the startup of PLC Do not execute it repeatedly It takes three seconds or longer to complete initialization following settin...

Page 913: ...e system relay SR9 carry flag CY is set to ON one of the error codes 1 IP address error to 4 default gateway error is set for the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code and the process is terminated For details of the available range of the address refer to 19 10 Ethernet Function IP Addresses Setting status when parameters are omitted IPv4 address is mandatory It must be indi...

Page 914: ...flag X62 turns ON upon the completion of initialization It takes about three seconds to complete initialization Each communication task of FTPc HTTPc and SMTPc starts according to the settings It is possible to confirm those states with the ready flag for each operation Each connection which automatic connection has been set is made and the clear to send flag turns ON when the connections are comp...

Page 915: ...ng is other than IPv4 To be set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256 CY SR9 Set when the instruction is executed while the specified IP address is incorrect The detail code set in SD29 is 1 Specification of incorrect IP address Set when the instruction is executed while the specified subnet mask is incorrect T...

Page 916: ...W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction performs a PING send request to the partner unit IP address of a specified connection for the number of times that is specified by S This instruction is used for checking the operation status of a communication relay device This instruction is dedicated to ET LAN Processing The PING request results a...

Page 917: ...Response time is in 10 ms unit When it is less than 10 ms 0 is stored D 4 Response time minimum D 5 Response time Average Execution result code D In the case of abnormal request 10 to 13 it is set when the instruction is executed and the PING request is not performed The response error 20 occurs when no response is returned from the Ethernet task Code Execution result H0 Normal end H10 Double star...

Page 918: ...the PING request transmission and response have been completed successfully when the response time is 10 13 or 22 ms When instruction is executed PING is being executed PING response is completed Example 3 Three times when PING request was made and the operation timed out once when the response time is 10 or 14 ms When instruction is executed PING is being executed PING response is completed 17 5 ...

Page 919: ... the communication unit S1 ET LAN port U100 S2 Connection 1 U1 PINGREQ instruction execution S Number of times of PING request U3 D Address for storing the results DT10 S1 S2 pPINGREQ U3 DT10 S D Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the device address specified by D to D 5 exceeds the upper limit of the device To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index mod...

Page 920: ...haracter constant S2 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the parameters for port setting or a character constant D1 Device address where the setting start connection number is stored or a constant D2 Device address where the setting end connection number is stored or a constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit devic...

Page 921: ... indicates the set parameters or a character constant When specifying a device area for an operand set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different Both upper and lower case characters can be used Abcd ABCD and abcd are all synonymous Set to make D1 be equal to or smaller than D2 The maximum number that can be set fo...

Page 922: ...er connections Option settings Essential Specify protocol options Available options differ according to operation modes OPTAV Option available OPTNAV Option not available Operation mode select OPTAV OPTNAV MEWTOCOL COM Connect with FP2 ET LAN Not connect MEWTOCOL7 COM Not available MODBUS TCP Not available MEWTOCOL DAT Connect with FP2 ET LAN Not connect MC protocol 3E BINARY Not available General...

Page 923: ...Examp le 1 S1 MEWCOM OPTAV CL AUTO TCP Settings Operating mode setting MEWCOM Option setting Option available Open type Server Client Client Open type Automatic Manual Open automatically Communication type TCP IP Examp le 2 S1 MODBUS OPTNAV SV MANU UDP Settings Operation mode setting MODBUS Option setting Option not available Open method Server Client Server any partner Open method Automatic Manua...

Page 924: ...ify the destination unit IP address of the setting start connection Specify the keyword IPv4 or IPv6 at the beginning For an IPv4 address IPv4 111 122 133 144 For an IPv6 address IPv6 1111 1222 1555 0 0 1888 When specifying IPv4 000 000 000 000 0 0 0 0 cannot be specified When specified CY flag SR9 turns ON and 1 IP address error is set to SD29 and the process is terminated An operation error does...

Page 925: ...inning PORT xxxx Unused connection disconnect time Essential Specify unused connection disconnect time 0 to 4294967295 10 ms unit However when 0 is specified connection is not automatically disconnected Specify the keyword DISCOUNT at the beginning DISCONT xxxx Setting example Examp le 1 S2 PORT 9000 DISCONT 0 Settings Master unit port number 9000 Unused connection disconnect time 0 Examp le 2 S2 ...

Page 926: ...ion To be set when there is a connection with the automatic open setting An operation error occurs if a set of connections in the range that is specified by D1 and D2 contains connections for a multi connection server To be set when GP_LARGE is specified for the operation mode setting in S1 and OPTNAV is specified for the option setting in S1 To be set when GP_LARGE is specified for the operation ...

Page 927: ...tion of the open operation can be confirmed by the status ON of the clear to send flag for the master communication or general purpose communication The open method setting automatic manual is not changed This instruction can be executed when the IP address establishment flag X62 is ON As an execution condition of the instruction insert a program that checks the status of the flag X62 If this inst...

Page 928: ...e S Connection number Specify a connection number 1 to 216 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when this instruction is executed for a connection other than the first connection in a multi c...

Page 929: ...circuit is already closed this instruction is not executed The completion of the close operation can be confirmed by the status OFF of the clear to send flag for the master communication or general purpose communication This instruction can be executed when the IP address establishment flag X62 is ON As an execution condition of the instruction insert a program that checks the status of the flag X...

Page 930: ...ge S Connection number Specify a connection number 1 to 216 maximum Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when this instruction is executed for a connection other than the first connection in ...

Page 931: ...the parameters for specifying time acquisition timing or a character constant Available devices Available Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Note 1 Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Processing This instruction sets a ...

Page 932: ...s the parameters for specifying a server or a character constant Setting item Settings S1 NTP server IP address or host name can be omitted Specify IP address or host name For an IP address specify the keyword IPv4 or IPv6 at the beginning For a host name specify HOST The number of characters should be within 68 characters including a keyword IPv4 IPv6 or HOST For an IPv4 address IPv4 111 122 133 ...

Page 933: ...turday HH hour 00 to 23 MM minute 00 to 59 Once monthly Specified date and time can be omitted Time data acquisition timing Once a month at a specified date and time MONTH DISABLE Not set DDHHMM Set DD 01 to 28 HH hour 00 to 23 MM minute 00 to 59 Input Once daily specified time Once weekly specified day of the week and time or Once monthly specified date and time separated by a comma The keywords ...

Page 934: ...s the string data that indicates the set parameters or a character constant When specifying a device area for an operand set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different When power supply is ON cannot be set for the acquisition timing After this instruction is executed if one of the settings Specified time once a day...

Page 935: ...ices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Outline of operation This instruction requests to adjust the time Processing Set the number of processing times for the time adjustment request by S1 If the time adjustment timeout is predicted ad...

Page 936: ...uring the execution of this instruction the execution of this instruction takes priority The execution of the SNTP request by the CPU configuration setting is performed as follows Timeout period 3 seconds Number of processing times 20 times Processing interval 16 seconds Even when the number of processing times S1 is set to zero specify a value within the normal range for the processing interval S...

Page 937: ...Time adjustment request Time is being adjusted Time adjustment retrieval is normally ended S1 U1 S2 U16 D DT10 When instruction is executed Time is being adjusted Time adjustment is completed Example 2 When a response timeout has occurred in the time adjustment S1 U3 S2 U16 D DT10 When instruction is executed Time is being adjusted Time adjustment is completed Timeout occurs after 41 seconds S1x3 ...

Page 938: ...t be canceled The following figures show some cases when the pNTPcREQ instruction is executed with the number of times S1 being 2 1 Normal execution Instruction execution No of processing times S1 2 NTP request Execution result area First request Second request During processing interval H FFFF H0 or H20 or H30 No of processing times 2 2 Cancelation of the processing during an NTP request Instruct...

Page 939: ... request H FFFF H20 Interruption of waiting for processing interval No of processing times 0 No of processing times 2 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not the built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program 17 10 pNTPcREQ Time Adjustment Request Instru...

Page 940: ...tant S2 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the login setting parameters or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the detailed setting parameters or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifi...

Page 941: ...e system relay SR9 carry flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number For S1 to S3 specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the set p...

Page 942: ...te 1 Input an FTP server number the IP address or host name of an FTP server a port number an open method and the SSL3 TLS1 authentication setting separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the parameters for specifying servers in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S1 SV0 IPv4 192 255 2 10 PORT 21 OPEN act SSL Sett...

Page 943: ...1 Input a user name and password separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the login setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S2 USER root PASS pidsx Settings User name root Password pidsx Exam ple 2 S2 USER PANASONIC PASS SUNX Settings User name PANASONIC Password SUNX Operand S2 user name and pas...

Page 944: ...en omitting the part after a specified keyword omit both and keyword When INITIAL or KEEP is specified instead of parameters the instruction operates according to the table of special keywords It is prohibited to specify the same keyword redundantly An error is caused in the case of redundant specification Setting item Settings Setting range S3 Timeout period Can be omitted Specify a timeout perio...

Page 945: ...Exam ple 2 S3 KEEP Settings Timeout period Not change Number of retries Not change Retry interval Not change Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter Set when the same keyword is specified redundantly To be set when even one request active relay of FTPc control relay or FTPc logging trace control relay is 1 Requesting To be set w...

Page 946: ... Note 1 For details of the error codes stored in the system data SD29 refer to 20 2 List of System Data Registers 17 11 FTPcSV FTP Client Connected Server Setting 17 58 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 947: ...ter constant PUT operation for a device Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates source device settings or a character constant GET operation for a device Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates destination device settings or a character constant S4 File transfer Starting address of the device area that stores the string ...

Page 948: ...nditions Operation The power supply for the PLC is switched from OFF to ON Setting using the configuration The PLC is changed to PROG mode Changes to RUN mode without rewriting the configuration Setting using instructions Changes to RUN mode after rewriting the configuration Setting using the configuration Data is actually sent to files or acquired from files when the FTP client transfer request F...

Page 949: ...not specified in ascending order If transfer settings have been already registered this rule is not applied Setting example Exam ple 1 S1 ID 1 Settings Transfer setting number 1 Exam ple 2 S1 ID 8 Settings Transfer setting number 8 Operand S2 setting Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the operation setting parameter or a character constant Setting item Settings S2 Specific...

Page 950: ... File after transfer Not deleted Overwrite method and rename method The overwrite method default or rename method can be selected for file transfer PUTFILE or PUTDATA Items Description Operation of overwrite method Files are written with specified file names When writing is interrupted for some reason such as trouble with the network or servers the partially written file remains It is not possible...

Page 951: ...le names Note 2 An error occurs when the number of files which match wild cards 101 or more Operand S3 setting PUT operation for a device Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates source device settings or a character constant Setting item Settings Setting range S3 Source device Global devices Specify device code device number Local devices PB PB nu...

Page 952: ... binary and the line feed position is set to 0 output the end of file only Note 4 When omitting Line feed position it is set to 0 Output the end of file only Setting example Exam ple 1 S3 WX16 32 BIN1w 0 Settings Device setting Device division Global Device code WX Device No 16 Number of transferred data 32 32 words Conversion method Unconverted 16 bit binary Line feed position Output the end of f...

Page 953: ...ion method 32 bit unsigned decimal Line feed position Output the end of file only Exam ple 8 S3 PB1_WY128 5 Settings Device setting Device division Local PB number 1 Device code WY Device number 128 Number of transferred data 5 5 words Conversion method Unconverted 16 bit binary Line feed position Output the end of file only Operand S3 setting when getting device Specify the starting address of th...

Page 954: ...transferred simultaneously is 1MB for all 16 IDs They are calculated with file size Setting example Exam ple 1 S3 WX16 32 BIN1w Settings Device setting Device division Global Device code WX Device number 16 Number of transferred data 32 32 words Conversion method Unconverted 16 bit binary Exam ple 2 S3 DT123456 250 SS Settings Device setting Device division Global Device code DT Device number 1234...

Page 955: ... extension of the file name File name Automatic addition position Specify the position of the automatic additional data added to a file name TOP Automatic additional data is added before a file name END Automatic additional data is added after a file name Automatic additional data is year month day hour minute and second yymmdd_hhmmss Note 1 Specify a destination file name within 240 characters No...

Page 956: ...he range is specified for the parameter To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN To be set when transfer setting numbers are not specified in ascending order Set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256 To be set when an FTP server that has not been specified with the des...

Page 957: ... address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the parameters for operation setting or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination folder name or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W ...

Page 958: ...SET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different Both upper and lower case characters can be used Abcd ABCD and abcd are all synonymous However the destination folder name is case sensitive This instruction is not available in interrupt programs Operand S1 setting Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that...

Page 959: ...constant A destination folder name should be specified within 256 one byte characters Setting item Settings Setting range S3 Destination folder name Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination folder name or a character constant Maximum 256 one byte characters Note 1 When the specified destination folder does not exist the folder is auto...

Page 960: ...n of Ethernet The detail code set in SD29 is 11 Ethernet initialization active Note 1 For details of the error codes stored in the system data SD29 refer to 20 2 List of System Data Registers 17 13 FTPcLOG FTP Client Logging Trace Transfer Setting 17 72 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 961: ...ransfer of the FTP client Before executing this instruction use the 17 12 FTPcSET FTP Client Transfer Setting instruction or the programming tool software FPWIN GR7 to configure HTTP transfer settings Operand S setting Setting item Settings Setting range S Transfer number Specify the device address storing a transfer number or a constant 0 to 15 Processing The transfer request relay of the transfe...

Page 962: ...unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number This instruction is not available in interrupt programs Timing chart The following diagram shows the process in which a transfer request is executed and data transfer from a server to FP7 is completed successfully The control relays bit0 to bit15 can be monitored by using the ETSTAT instruction to read and store their state in arbitrar...

Page 963: ...1 The state of completion codes can be read with ETSTAT instruction When the instruction is executed under one of the following conditions a transfer error occurs and the corresponding error code is set in the execution done code Status Code Status Code Destination server is not set 1 Transfer prohibition setting 5 Transfer setting is not set 2 Data decompression failed When accessing data with PU...

Page 964: ...t has not been specified with the transfer setting instruction or the tool software is specified CY SR9 To be set when executed while the Ethernet cable is disconnected The detail code set in SD29 is 10 Ethernet cable disconnected To be set when executed during the initialization of Ethernet The detail code set in SD29 is 11 Ethernet initialization active Note 1 For details of the error codes stor...

Page 965: ...it device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 Outline of operation This instruction configures the settings for enabling disabling or canceling transfers for an FTP client Before executing this instruction use the FTPcSET FTP Client Transfer Setting instruction or the programming tool software FPWIN GR7 to con...

Page 966: ...eted successfully the system relay SR9 carry flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number For S1 and S2 specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data tha...

Page 967: ...10 Note 1 DT0 Value DT0 4 No of characters DT1 H44 D H49 I DT2 H30 0 H31 1 DT3 DT10 Value DT10 6 No of characters DT11 H4E N H45 E DT12 H42 B H41 A DT13 H45 E H4C L DT14 Note 1 For specifying a device for an operand which can specify character constants store string data with SSET instruction excluding a double quotation mark Operation of FTPc control relay Name Transfer enabled Transfer disabled ...

Page 968: ...o be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256 To be set when a file transfer that has not been specified with the transfer setting instruction or the tool software is specified To be set when a logging trace transfer setting that has...

Page 969: ...area that stores the string data that indicates the login setting parameters or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the detailed setting parameters or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M...

Page 970: ...ssfully the system relay SR9 carry flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number For S1 to S3 specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates...

Page 971: ...L3 TLS1 authentication SSL Use SSL3 TLS1 NON Not use Default Not use Note 1 Input an HTTP server number the IP address or host name of an HTTP server a port number and the SSL3 TLS1 authentication setting separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the parameters for specifying servers in the order of the above table Setting example Exa...

Page 972: ...ing PASS XXX Default root Maximum 32 one byte characters Note 1 Input a user name and password separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the login setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S2 USER root PASS pidsx Settings User name root Password pidsx Exam ple 2 S2 USER PANASONIC PASS SUNX Settings ...

Page 973: ... retries Can be omitted Specify the number of retries RTRY Number of retries Default 3 times 0 to 3 Retry interval Can be omitted Specify the retry interval RTTM Retry interval Default 600 seconds 10 to 86400 seconds Note 1 Input a timeout period number of retries and retry interval separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the detail...

Page 974: ...fied redundantly To be set when the transfer request relay of HTTPc transfer control relay is 1 Requesting To be set when Add on is set to Not use in Built in ET LAN setting To be set when server numbers are not specified in the right order To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN To be set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of char...

Page 975: ...nt S2 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the parameters for operation setting or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates source device settings or a character constant S4 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination URL or a character constant D...

Page 976: ...ted after the completion of the HTTP client transfer settings This instruction can be executed when the Ethernet initialization active flag X61 is OFF As an execution condition of the instruction insert a program that checks the status of the flag X61 If this instruction is executed when the flag X61 is ON the system relay SR9 carry flag CY is set and the instruction is terminated without being ex...

Page 977: ...rvers 3 digits fixed SV0 Server 0 SV1 Server 1 SV2 Server 2 SV3 Server 3 Target and operation of transfer Specify the target device and operation Send or Get of transfer UPLOAD The target is Device and the operation is Send DOWNLOAD The target is Device and the operation is Get UPDOWN The target is Device and the operation is Send and Get Command used Specify a command to be used for transfer POST...

Page 978: ...that can be simultaneously transferred is 1 MB for all 16 IDs 1 to 1048576 1MB Note 1 Input each source device setting parameter separated by a comma Note 2 Specify the operation setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S3 WX16 32 Settings Device setting Device division Global Device code WX Device number 16 Number of bytes 32 bytes Exam ple 2 S3 DT123456 250 S...

Page 979: ...at can be simultaneously transferred is 1 MB for all 16 IDs 1 to 1048576 1MB Note 1 Input each setting parameter for the destination device setting separated by a comma Note 2 Specify the operation setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S3 WX16 32 Settings Device setting Device division Global Device code WX Device number 16 Number of bytes 32 bytes Exam ple ...

Page 980: ...The number of bytes that can be simultaneously transferred is 1 MB for all 16 IDs 1 to 1048576 1MB Maximum number of acquisitions number of bytes Specify the maximum number of acquisitions number of bytes 1 to 7 digits Data can be obtained up to the maximum number of acquisitions The number of bytes that can be simultaneously acquired is 1 MB for all 16 IDs 1 to 1048576 1MB Note 1 Input each sourc...

Page 981: ...ration for a device Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination URL or a character constant Specify a folder name and file name with its relative path from the home directory of the user who logs in to the HTTP server Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set w...

Page 982: ... settings Processing The transfer request relay of the transfer number that is specified by S is turned ON This instruction can be executed when the HTTP client preparation done flag X68 is ON As an execution condition of the instruction insert a program that checks the status of the flag X68 An operation error occurs if this instruction is executed when the flag X68 is OFF This instruction can be...

Page 983: ...quest is executed and data transfer from a server to FP7 is completed successfully The control relays bit0 to bit15 can be monitored by using the ETSTAT instruction to read and store their state in arbitrary operation devices Transfer request relay ETSTAT D bit0 HTTP client preparation done flag X68 1 2 3 4 5 6 Transfer active relay ETSTAT D bit1 Retry active relay ETSTAT D bit2 Execution done rel...

Page 984: ...TAT instruction Done codes Name Number of words Description Execution done code 1 Execution done code Transfer done code 1 Response code of HTTP client Note 1 The state of completion codes can be read with ETSTAT instruction When the instruction is executed under one of the following conditions a transfer error occurs and the corresponding error code is set in the execution done code Status Code S...

Page 985: ...equest Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when a transfer setting that has not been specified with the transfer setting instruction or the tool software is specified CY SR9 To be set when the instruction is executed while the Ethernet cable is disconnected The detail code set in SD29 is 10 Ethernet cable disconnected Set when the instruction is the initialization of Ethernet The d...

Page 986: ...bled canceled or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 Outline of operation This instruction configures the settings for enabling or disabling transfers for an HTTP client Before executing this instruction use 17...

Page 987: ...nd the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number For S1 and S2 specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the set parameters or a character constant...

Page 988: ...of characters DT1 H44 D H49 I DT2 H30 0 H31 1 DT3 DT10 Value DT10 6 No of characters DT11 H4E N H45 E DT12 H42 B H41 A DT13 H45 E H4C L DT14 Note 1 For specifying a device for an operand which can specify character constants store string data with SSET instruction excluding a double quotation mark Operation of HTTPc control relay Name Transfer enabled Transfer disabled Transfer canceled Transfer c...

Page 989: ... control content S2 To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256 CY SR9 Set when the instruction is the initialization of Ethernet The detail code that is set in SD29 is 11 Ethernet initialization active Note 1 For details of the e...

Page 990: ...e 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 Outline of operation This instruction sets the specified text as mail text Processing The text that is specified by S2 is set in the mail text for the setting number that is specified by S1 The instruction can be executed when the mail send request relay for ...

Page 991: ...uccessfully the system relay SR9 carry flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number Make the event mail setting before executing the instruction This instruction is not available in i...

Page 992: ... 65 e H 43 C H 20 H 00 H 2E Data part Data part DT222 DT223 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN To be set when an out of range value is specified for parameters Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when the send re...

Page 993: ...Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Outline of operation This instruction reads the contents of mail texts Processing The instruction is used to read the text creation form that is set for mail text in the mail setting screen of the setting tool When a mail text is not set it cannot be read Zero is stored in the...

Page 994: ... flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number Make the event mail setting before executing the instruction This instruction is not available in interrupt programs Operand S setting Sp...

Page 995: ...in indirect access index modification To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN To be set when an out of range value is specified for parameters Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when the send request of the mail transmission control relay of a target ID number is 1 Requesting To be set when the mail transmission setting for a target ID n...

Page 996: ...ormation or a character constant S2 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the authentication setting parameters or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the detailed setting parameters or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integ...

Page 997: ...d the instruction is terminated without being executed When the instruction is completed successfully the system relay SR9 carry flag CY and the system data register SD29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number When spec...

Page 998: ...ases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the sender information in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S1 NAME FP7_001 FROM pana pana com IPv4 192 255 2 10 PORT 25 SSL Settings Source name FP7_001 source e mail address pana pana com IP address 192 255 2 10 Port number 25 SSL3 TLS1 authentication Use Exam ple 2 S1 FROM sunx sunx com IPv6 1111 1222 a8dd 0 0 6666 PO...

Page 999: ...XXX Default root Maximum 32 one byte characters Note 1 Input an SMTP authentication method an account and a password separated by a comma Note 2 Both upper and lower cases can be used for specifying keywords Note 3 Specify the authentication setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S2 CRAM ACCOUNT sunx PASS control Settings SMTP authentication method CRAM MD5 A...

Page 1000: ...Not use Account Not use Password Not change Exam ple 2 S2 KEEP Settings SMTP authentication method Not change Account Not change Password Not change Operand S3 setting Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the detailed setting parameters or a character constant A part of parameters can be omitted The settings are not changed when parameters are ...

Page 1001: ...n specifying 38 seconds 30 seconds are set Note 4 Specify the authentication setting parameters in the order of the above table Setting example Exam ple 1 S3 MAILSIZE 1000 TOUT 30 RTRY 2 RTTM 500 JPN Settings Maximum size 1000 Timeout period 30 seconds Number of retries 2 Retry interval 500 seconds Language Japanese Exam ple 2 S3 MAILSIZE 10000 TOUT 270 RTRY 0 RTTM 4900 ENG Settings Maximum size 1...

Page 1002: ... logging trace control relay is 1 Requesting To be set when Add on is set to Not use in Built in ET LAN setting To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN Set when executed in an interrupt program Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256 CY SR9 To be set when the instruction is executed with an incorrect IP add...

Page 1003: ...ing data that indicates a destination group name or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination address host name or a character constant S4 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a destination address domain name or a character constant Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan...

Page 1004: ...29 Ethernet communication error code are cleared Precautions for programming Insert the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number When specifying a device area for S1 to S4 set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different The...

Page 1005: ...st name Specify a destination address host name Specify the keyword TO at the beginning TO Destination address Note 1 The destination address of S3 can be specified with a host name only or host name and domain name Note 2 When a domain name is omitted the destination address is created by the addition of the domain name of S4 Note 3 Multiple addresses can be specified by separating each address w...

Page 1006: ...specified domain name is added Note 2 When all domain names are specified for the specification of the destination addresses of S3 the specification of the domain name of S4 can be omitted Note 3 Only one domain name can be specified Note 4 Upper and lower case characters can be used for specifying keywords Setting example Exam ple 1 S4 DOMAIN sunx co jp Settings Domain name sunx co jp Exam ple 2 ...

Page 1007: ...estination server setting instruction or the tool software is specified CY SR9 Set when the instruction is the initialization of Ethernet The detail code set in SD29 is 11 Ethernet initialization active Note 1 For details of the error codes stored in the system data SD29 refer to 20 2 List of System Data Registers 17 23 SMTPcADD Destination Group Setting WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 17 119 ...

Page 1008: ... destination group number and the subject of the mail to be sent or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the text of the mail to be sent or a character constant S4 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the attached data specification of the mail to be sent or a character constant Devices that...

Page 1009: ... set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different Both upper and lower case characters can be used Abcd ABCD and abcd are all synonymous However the subject the mail text and the attachment file name are case sensitive This instruction is not available in interrupt programs Operand S1 setting Specify the starting add...

Page 1010: ...y week week hh mm ss w Specify the format of yyyy as follows ss seconds 0 to 59 mm minutes 0 to 59 hh hours 0 to 23 DD 1 to 31 days MM months 1 to 12 w weeks 0 to 6 Specify w for every week as follows 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Cycle Specify CYCLIC and the following strings in combination for the keyword TRIG TRIG CYCLIC xxxx Setting value of cycle time ...

Page 1011: ...gger Time Every week at 23 50 on Friday Exam ple 5 S1 ID 4 TRIG CYCLIC 30SEC Settings Setting number 4 Send trigger Cycle 30 second cycle Exam ple 6 S1 ID 5 TRIG CYCLIC 10MIN Settings Setting number 5 Send trigger Cycle 10 minute cycle Exam ple 7 S1 ID 6 TRIG CYCLIC 12HOUR Settings Setting number 6 Send trigger Cycle 12 hour cycle Exam ple 8 S1 ID 7 TRIG PROGRAM Settings Setting number 7 Send trig...

Page 1012: ...ed with pluses can be selected at the same time 0 to 7 Subject Specify a mail subject User specified subject SUBJECT xxxxx Automatically generated subject SUBJECTAUTO For details of subjects generated automatically refer to Subjects automatically generated Note 1 Input each setting parameter separated by a comma Note 2 Each parameter cannot be omitted Specify them in the order of the above table T...

Page 1013: ...er specified subject Cyclic Notify Mail Exam ple 3 S2 GRPNO 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SUBJECTAUTO Settings Destination group numbers 0 to 7 Subject Automatically generated Operand S3 setting Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the setting of the text of the mail to be sent or a character constant Setting item Settings S3 Mail text Specify the starting a...

Page 1014: ...er to the section How to specify devices For information on how to specify attached files refer to Specify attached file Specify a file to be attached with full path after specifying FILE for the keyword ATT ATT FILE FileName LOG folder names LOG0 to LOG15 cannot be specified Automatic additional information Character strings added to mails Japanese Character strings added to mails English Basic i...

Page 1015: ...the mail server setting Device information added to mail text Character strings added to mails Japanese Character strings added to mails English Device get information Device get information Device number DT100 Device number DT100 Getting number 4 devices Getting number 4 devices Conversion method Exchange method 1234 5558 764 18270 1234 5558 764 18270 Note 1 The language to be output to mails is ...

Page 1016: ... to 255 0 Output the end of file only n Output by n data Operand S4 Attached file setting Setting item Description Attached File Name Output a device value and specify the name of the file to be attached to the mail after the keyword FILE FILE xxxxxxxxx File name Automatic addition position Specify the position of the automatic additional data added to a file name TOP Automatic additional data is ...

Page 1017: ...ata specify file Folder FileName bin Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when an out of range value is specified for parameters To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN To be set when setting numbers are not specified in ascending order To be set when the same destination group number is specified redundantly To be set when executed in a...

Page 1018: ...ing address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a subject and a destination group number or a character constant S3 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates mail text or a character constant S4 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the settings for text auto generation and file attachments or a...

Page 1019: ...the UNITSEL instruction immediately before this instruction and specify the unit built in ET LAN in the CPU unit and the connection number For S1 to S4 specify the starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates the set parameters or a character constant When specifying a device area for an operand set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESS...

Page 1020: ...in the order of the above table The order of keywords cannot be changed Note 3 Upper and lower case characters can be used for specifying keywords Setting example Exam ple 1 S2 GRPNO 0 SUBJECT LogFileSend Settings Subject LogFileSend Destination group number 0 Exam ple 2 S2 GrpNo 0 1 2 3 4 5 Subject TestSend Settings Subject TestSend Destination group numbers 0 1 2 3 4 5 Exam ple 3 S2 GrpNo 0 1 2 ...

Page 1021: ...h files ATT FILE Note 1 Input each parameter for setting whether or not to generate a message automatically and whether or not to attach files separated by a comma Note 2 The parameters for the automatic generation and file attachment cannot be omitted Specify them in the order of the above table The order of keywords cannot be changed Note 3 Upper and lower case characters can be used for specify...

Page 1022: ...d specifying character constant exceeds 256 To be set when an unset destination group number is specified To be set when a mail sending server is not specified To be set when a mail sending server that has not been specified with the destination server setting instruction or the tool software is specified To be set when a destination group number that has not been specified with the destination gr...

Page 1023: ...relay for the send number that is specified by S is turned ON This instruction can be executed when the cable disconnection detection flag X60 is OFF As an execution condition of the instruction insert a program that checks the status of the flag X60 If this instruction is executed when the flag X60 is ON the system relay SR9 carry flag CY is set and the instruction is terminated without being exe...

Page 1024: ...er to FP7 is completed successfully The control relays bit0 to bit15 can be monitored by using the ETSTAT instruction to read and store their state in arbitrary operation devices Transfer cancel request relay ETSTAT D bit14 Send request relay ETSTAT D bit0 SMTP client preparation done flag X69 1 2 3 4 5 6 Send active relay ETSTAT D bit1 Send retry active relay ETSTAT D bit2 Execution done relay ET...

Page 1025: ...tions a transfer error occurs and the corresponding error code is set in the execution done code Status Code Status Code Destination server is not set 1 Transfer prohibition setting 5 Transfer setting is not set 2 Data decompression failed When accessing data with PUT 8 Destination group is not set 3 Data decompression failed When accessing data with GET 9 Registering a process request failed 4 SM...

Page 1026: ... the mail transmission setting instruction or the tool software is specified SR9 CY To be set when the instruction is executed while the Ethernet cable is disconnected The detail code set in SD29 is 10 Ethernet cable disconnected Set when the instruction is the initialization of Ethernet The detail code set in SD29 is 11 Ethernet initialization active Note 1 For details of the error codes stored i...

Page 1027: ...it device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 Outline of operation This instruction configures the settings for enabling disabling or canceling the sending of mail Before executing this instruction use the 17 24 SMTPcSET Mail Transmission Setting instruction or the programming tool software FPWIN...

Page 1028: ...nd the connection number For S1 and S2 specify the starting address of the device storing the string data which indicates the set parameters or a character constant When specifying a device area for an operand set string data using the SSET instruction in advance However the ESSET instruction cannot be used because the format is different Both upper and lower case characters can be used Abcd ABCD ...

Page 1029: ... 1 The send cancel relay turns OFF when the SMTPc transfer request instruction is executed Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when an item other than IDx or LOGx or ALL is specified for the control target S1 x 0 to 15 To be set when an item other than ENABLE DISABLE or CANCEL is specified for the control content S2 To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not ...

Page 1030: ...t S2 Starting address of the device area that stores the string data that indicates a target to be read or a character constant D Specify the starting address of the device area that stores the read information Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ...

Page 1031: ...he communication state of EtherNet IP Specify ALL or ALL Number For specifying the cyclic communication registration node table Specify NODE For specifying the cyclic communication normal node table Specify NORMAL For specifying the cyclic communication stop node table Specify STOP For specifying the cyclic communication abnormal node table Specify ERR For specifying the RUN IDLE bit monitor PLC s...

Page 1032: ...ing to the registered maximum node number Maximum node number Number of valid words 0 0 1 to 16 1 17 to 32 2 33 to 48 3 49 to 64 4 225 to 239 15 241 to 256 16 Note 2 When specifying ALL Number 1 to 16 for S2 the information for the number of effective words that is specified by the Number is read Note 3 The bits in the following table are allocated to the node table numbers and RUN IDLE bit monito...

Page 1033: ... 2x16 nodes node numbers 1 to 32 is read S1 EIP S2 ALL 2 D DT20 Value DT20 15 Maximum registration node number DT21 1st word Cyclic communication registration node table Node nos 1 to 16 DT22 2nd word Cyclic communication registration node table Node nos 17 to 32 DT23 1st word Cyclic communication normal node table Node nos 1 to 16 DT24 2nd word Cyclic communication normal node table Node nos 17 t...

Page 1034: ...ble Node nos 33 to 48 Example 6 When specifying the reading of cyclic communication normal node table S1 EIP S2 NORMAL D WY100 Value WY100 7 Maximum registration node number WY101 0000 0000 0111 1111 Cyclic communication normal node table Node nos 1 to 16 Example 7 When specifying the reading of cyclic communication stop node table S1 EIP S2 STOP D WR100 Value WR100 8 Maximum registration node num...

Page 1035: ...set to an item other than IPv4 IPv6 FTPc HTTPc SMTPc or EIP To be set when the target to be read S2 is set to an item other than MAC CONNECT IDx LOGx IDALL LOGALL ALL NODE NORMAL STOP ERR or PLC To be set when a combination other than the combinations listed in the restrictions on combination is specified for the type S1 and target S2 to be read To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not ...

Page 1036: ... S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Processing The status of the node for the node number that is specified by S is stored in the device that is specified by D1 and the execution result of the instruction is stored in D2 The node status is acquired when the trigger execution condition turns ON Precautions for programming Execute this instruction after X6B EtherNet IP prep...

Page 1037: ...nor Unrecoverable Fault 10 Major Recoverable Fault 11 Major Unrecoverable Fault 12 to 15 Reserved It is always 0 Note 1 For bits 4 to 7 the following field definition contents for Extended Device Status are stored FP7 does not return the codes that are indicated as Not supported in the following table Bits 4 to 7 Name FP7 0000 During self testing operation or unknown Not suppor ted 0001 During the...

Page 1038: ... CIP extended status are stored If the value of D is not 5 0 is stored in D2 1 and D2 2 D2 2 CIP extended status 0 to 65535 Usage example Example 1 Acquires the node status of node number 1 EtherNet IP configuration setting The EtherNet IP devices that the node status is acquired should be registered in the scan list Node IP address Valid Invalid flag 1 192 168 1 6 Invalid 2 192 168 1 7 Enabled Th...

Page 1039: ...he initial preset is required to acquire the execution result of the EIPNDST instruction Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not the built in ET LAN To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification Set when executed in an...

Page 1040: ... rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation This instruction specifies the Ethernet unit to be targeted by the UNITSEL instruction It sets the destination data of EIPMSEND instruction in the send buffer The EIPMBODY instruction is used in combination with the EIPMSATT and EIPMSEND instruction When this instruction is called...

Page 1041: ...ute_Single service for an EtherNet IP device IP address 192 168 1 10 to read the product code of the Identity object S DT10 Value DT9 DT10 U192 DT11 U168 DT12 U1 DT13 U10 DT14 000EH DT15 0001H DT16 0001H DT17 0003H DT18 Setting item Set value Destination IP address 192 168 1 10 Service code 000EH Class ID 0001H Instance ID 0001H Attribute ID 0003H Example 2 When executing the Continuous Data Read ...

Page 1042: ...ote 1 FFFFH is specified when this is omitted Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not an Ethernet unit To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the device address of S 7 is outside the device range 17 30 E...

Page 1043: ... Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Outline of operation This instruction specifies the Ethernet unit to be targeted by the UNITSEL instruction It sets the message body data of EIPMSEND instruction in the send buffer The EIPMBODY instruction is used in combination with the EIP...

Page 1044: ...byte Max 500 bytes 3 1byte 0x02 0x0021 2byte Max 498 bytes 4 1byte 0x02 0x20 1byte 0x24 1byte Max 498 bytes 5 1byte 0x03 0x20 1byte 0x0025 2byte Max 496 bytes 6 1byte 0x03 0x0021 2byte 0x24 1byte Max 496 bytes 7 1byte 0x04 0x0021 2byte 0x0025 2byte Max 494 bytes 8 1byte 0x03 0x20 1byte 0x24 1byte 0x30 1byte Max 496 bytes 9 1byte 0x04 0x20 1byte 0x24 1byte 0x0031 2byte Max 494 bytes 10 1byte 0x04 0...

Page 1045: ...ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not an Ethernet unit To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range in indirect access index modification Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set when the end of the message body data specified by S exceeds the device limit 17 31 EIP...

Page 1046: ...D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D1 D2 Outline of operation This instruction sends an EIP message when the execution condition turns ON This instruction specifies the Ethernet unit to be targeted by the UNITSEL instruction A UCMM message set by the EIPMSATT and EIPMBODY instructions is sent The response is stored Call this instruction after X6B EIP preparation done turns ON If it...

Page 1047: ...complete In progress 1 Message communication is being performed Timeout 2 Communication timeout 10 seconds Multiple executions 3 Multiple executions of EIPMSEND instruction Communication error 4 In the case of communication errors CIP error 5 In the case of CIP errors EIP communication preparation incomplete 6 When the preparation of EIP communication is incomplete Send message size error 7 When t...

Page 1048: ...estination data using the EIPMSATT instruction EIPMSATT DT100 S 3 Create a value to be set in the message body data using the CIPMSET instruction CIPMSET DT200 U5 DT500 S1 Example 1 D 4 Set the message body data using the EIPMBODY instruction EIPMBODY DT500 S 5 Perform message communication using the EIPMSEND instruction Received data is stored in D1 and execution results are stored in D2 EIPMSEND...

Page 1049: ... SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not an Ethernet unit To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range in indirect access index modification Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when 253 word device cannot be assured from the device address specified by D1 To be set when 3 word d...

Page 1050: ...tline of operation This instruction is used to create data to be sent in the message communication of CIP If there already exists CIP message data in the storage destination the data is added to the existing CIP message data Processing The data specified to be added by S1 is added merged to the CIP message specified by D according to the format specified by S2 S1 Specify the starting device of the...

Page 1051: ...dy exists and the new data is added next to the position shifted from the starting data by the number of bytes of the existing data When writing is completed the added data size length is added to the CIP data length CIP message send data format Value D CIP data length D 1 onward CIP data Complex data consisting of short type double type and string data type Example D DT100 Data write starting pos...

Page 1052: ...age destination Value Value Value DT0 00H 05H S2 0002H DT100 0000H Data length DT1 42H B 41H A DT101 34H 12H DT2 44H D 43H C DT3 00H 45H E Operation result S1 Data to be added D CIP message storage destination Value Move data equivalent to 2 bytes Value DT0 00H 05H DT100 0002H Data length DT1 42H B 41H A DT101 0005H DT2 44H D 43H C DT3 00H 45H E 17 33 CIPMSET CIP Message Data Setting Merging 17 16...

Page 1053: ...length DT1 42H B 41H A Writing character string data DT101 34H 12H DT2 44H D 43H C DT102 78H 56H DT3 00H 45H E DT103 12H 90H DT104 56H 34H Operation result S1 Data to be added D CIP message storage destination Value Move data of string length 2 bytes Value DT0 00H 05H DT100 0007H Data length DT1 42H B 41H A DT101 0005H String length DT2 44H D 43H C DT102 B A DT3 00H 45H E DT103 D C DT104 56H E 17 ...

Page 1054: ...00H 03H S2 0004H DT100 0003H Data length DT2 32H 2 31H 1 DT101 0001H Written data DT3 00H 33H 3 DT102 12H A DT103 56H 34H DT104 90H 78H Operation result S1 Data to be added D CIP message storage destination Value Move data equivalent to 4 bytes Value DT1 00H 03H DT100 0003H 0007H Data length DT2 32H 2 31H 1 DT101 0001H DT3 00H 33H 3 DT102 03H A DT103 31H 00H DT104 90H 32H 17 33 CIPMSET CIP Message...

Page 1055: ...1 Data to be added D CIP message storage destination Value Move data of string length 2 bytes Value DT1 00H 03H DT100 0003H Data length DT2 32H 2 31H 1 DT101 0001H DT3 00H 33H 3 DT102 03H A DT103 1 00H String length DT104 3 2 Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range in ...

Page 1056: ...Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D1 D2 Outline of operation This instruction acquires string data and numerical data from the data received in the message communication of CIP Data other than string data is read from lower bytes Processing Data is separated and transferr...

Page 1057: ...a is for the character string length DT7 ffH 12H 3rd data 1234H S2 Specify the data format and data size of the data to be acquired Specified range 0 to 504 000H to 1F8H Set value Description 0 Character string Specify when acquired data is character strings Acquire data equivalent to Starting device value of S1 2 1 to 504 Other than character string Specify when acquired data is other than charac...

Page 1058: ...data length DT1 CIP receive header DT2 DT3 0001H 1st data DT4 02H 31H 1 DT5 41H A 00H 2nd data Acquisition data DT6 34H 42H B DT7 ffH 12H 3rd data Offset position Value DT0 The data length is not included in the offset position DT1 1 0 The CIP header is also extracted DT2 3 2 DT3 5 4 DT4 7 6 DT5 9 8 DT6 B A DT7 D C D2 Specify the storage destination device for the acquired data 17 34 CIPMGET CIP M...

Page 1059: ...ecting an error even an illegal offset position is specified Fully grasp the content of a received CIP message and then set the offset position and data size Even if the acquisition source S1 range overlaps with the storage location D2 range data is acquired without causing any error 17 34 CIPMGET CIP Message Data Getting WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 17 171 ...

Page 1060: ...re data from the start of CIP message data Data is acquired to the following device DT0 000DH Total data length DT1 00CBH 0000H CIP receive header 1 DT1000 DT2 DT3 0001H 1st data 2 DT2000 DT4 02H 31H 1 DT5 41H A 00H 2nd data 3 DT3000 DT6 34H 42H B DT7 ffH 12H 3rd data 4 DT4000 17 34 CIPMGET CIP Message Data Getting 17 172 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1061: ...1 CIP message receive data D1 Offset position Value Value DT0 000DH Acquiring data equivalent to 4 bytes DT100 0000H 0004H DT1 00CBH D2 Acquired data DT2 0000H Value DT3 0001H DT1000 00CBH DT4 02H 31H 1 DT1001 0000H DT5 41H A 42H B DT6 34H DT7 ffH 12H Offset position after updating Value DT0 DT1 1 0 CIP receive data DT2 3 2 DT3 5 4 1st data DT4 7 6 DT5 9 8 2nd data DT6 B A DT7 D C 3rd data 17 34 C...

Page 1062: ... data item when the CIPMGET instruction is issued 1 Operation result S1 CIP message receive data D1 Offset position Value Value DT0 000DH DT100 0004H 0007H DT1 00CBH D2 Acquired data DT2 0000H Acquiring data equivalent to the character string length 24 bytes Value DT3 0001H DT2000 0001H DT4 02H 31H 1 DT2001 ffH 1 DT5 41H A 00H DT6 34H 42H B DT7 ffH 12H Offset position after updating Value DT0 DT1 ...

Page 1063: ...d data item when the CIPMGET instruction is issued 2 Operation result S1 CIP message receive data D1 Offset position Value Value DT0 000DH DT100 0007H 000BH DT1 00CBH D2 Acquired data DT2 0000H Acquiring data equivalent to the character string length 24 bytes Value DT3 0001H DT3000 0002H DT4 02H 31H 1 DT3001 B A DT5 41H A 00H DT6 34H 42H B DT7 ffH 12H Offset position after updating Value DT0 DT1 1...

Page 1064: ...000DH DT100 000BH 000DH DT1 00CBH D2 Acquired data DT2 0000H Value DT3 0001H DT4000 1234H DT4 02H 31H 1 Acquiring data equivalent to 2 bytes DT4001 0000H DT5 41H A 00H DT6 34H 42H B DT7 ffH 12H Offset position after updating Value DT0 DT1 1 0 CIP receive data DT2 3 2 DT3 5 4 1st data DT4 7 6 DT5 9 8 2nd data DT6 B A DT7 D C 3rd data Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the Et...

Page 1065: ... interrupted 0x08 Service not supported The requested service was not implemented Or it was not defined for this object class instance 0x09 Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data was detected 0x0A Attribute list error An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non zero status 0x0B Already in requested mode state The object is already in the mode state being...

Page 1066: ...nition accurately represents the detected error 0x20 Invalid parameter A parameter associated with the request was invalid This code is used if a parameter does not comply with the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an application object specification 0x21 Write once value or medium already written An attempt was made to write to a write once medium for example W...

Page 1067: ...ance Not Deletable The requested object instance cannot be deleted 0x2E Service Not Supported for Specified Path 1 The object supports the service but not for the designated application path for example attribute Note This cannot be used in cases where more specific general status codes are applied Example 0x0E attributes are not settable or 0x29 members are not settable 0x2F to 0xCF Reserved by C...

Page 1068: ... D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Processing The instruction requests the starting of the EtherNet IP cyclic communication according to the start request node number table that is stored in the area that starts from S For n specify the maximum node number among the nodes to which the start of the EtherNet IP cyclic communication is requested The execution result is stored in D Op...

Page 1069: ... 16 1 17 to 32 2 33 to 48 3 49 to 64 4 225 to 239 15 241 to 256 16 Operand D setting Specify the device address storing execution results Code Status Description 0 Normal end The specified node start is complete 1 In progress The specified node start processing is in progress 2 Start failed The specified node start failed 3 Multiple executions Multiple execution of the EIPSTART instruction or the ...

Page 1070: ...ible period 3 The specified node start is complete Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not the built in ET LAN To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when the value of n exceeds 256 To be set when the address that is specified by S Number...

Page 1071: ...T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Processing The instruction requests the stopping of the EtherNet IP cyclic communication according to the stop request node number table that is stored in the area that starts from S For n specify the maximum node number among the nodes to which the stop of the EtherNet IP cyclic communication is requested The execution result is stored in D O...

Page 1072: ...to 16 1 17 to 32 2 33 to 48 3 49 to 64 4 225 to 239 15 241 to 256 16 Operand D setting Specify the device address storing execution results Code Status Description 0 Normal end The specified node stop is complete 1 In progress The specified node stop processing is in progress 2 Start failed The specified node stop failed 3 Multiple executions Multiple execution of the EIPSTART instruction or the E...

Page 1073: ...ible period 3 The specified node stop is complete Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set when the unit specified by UNITSEL is not the built in ET LAN To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration Set when executed in an interrupt program To be set when the value of n exceeds 256 To be set when the address that is specified by S Number ...

Page 1074: ... SF D F S1 S2 D Processing Only when the connection that is to be refreshed receives new data this instruction refreshes data for the connection Input refresh means that the data is copied from the receive buffers to the allocated devices Precautions for programming Execute this instruction after the EtherNet IP preparation done flag X6B turns ON If the instruction is executed before the flag turn...

Page 1075: ...r also occurs when a reserved node is specified Set value Scan List 1 to 256 Operand S2 setting Specify a connection number to be refreshed Specify a relative number within nodes for the connection number An error occurs when a value over the maximum value specified by the scan list is specified Set value Connection number 1 to 256 Operand D setting Specify the device address storing refresh resul...

Page 1076: ...item Settings Node number 1 Connection 1 Input information T 0 device allocation LD20 to LD23 LD51 to LD52 Receive buffer Value Value Value 0 0011h LD19 DT20 0 1 2233h LD20 0011h 2 4455h LD21 2233h 3 6677h LD22 4455h 4 LD23 6677h 5 LD24 6 7 EEFFh LD50 8 FFEEh LD51 EEFFh 9 LD52 FFEEh LD53 Note 1 Receive buffers to which devices are allocated 17 37 EIP_IN EtherNet IP Input Refresh 17 188 WUME FP7CPU...

Page 1077: ...when the scan time is long and RPI is short When acquiring for each received data Scan time 10 ms RPI transmission interval for the EtherNet IP cyclic communication 500 µs When the scan time is longer than the setting time of RPI the refresh cannot be executed during the processing In this case describe the EIP_IN instruction in a fixed cycle execution type PB and use interrupt processing to execu...

Page 1078: ...lues in indirect access index modification Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set when the node that is specified by S1 or the connection that is specified by S2 does not exist Use this instruction only for the connections in which the refresh method of the EtherNet IP setting is set to Instruction An operation error occurs when the connection that other refres...

Page 1079: ...TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 D Processing This instruction executes the output refresh for connections to be refreshed Output refresh means that the data is copied from the allocated devices to the send buffers Precautions for programming Execute this instruction after the EtherNet IP preparation done flag X6B turns ON If the instruction is executed before the flag turns ON the EtherNet IP communi...

Page 1080: ...r sending data to a destination scanner device PLC Set value I O map 0 Scan List 1 to 256 Operand S2 setting Specify a connection number to be refreshed Specify a relative number within nodes for the connection number Set value I O map number or connection number 1 to 256 Operand D setting Specify the device address storing refresh results If this instruction is executed in a cycle faster than RPI...

Page 1081: ...setting Setting item Settings I O map number 1 Device Allocation LD10 to LD11 LD14 to LD16 Value Send buffer Value Value LD10 2233h 0 DT10 0 LD11 4455h 1 2233h LD12 2 4455h LD13 3 LD14 AABBh 4 LD15 CCDDh 5 AABBh LD16 EEFFh 6 CCDDh LD17 7 EEFFh 8 Note 1 Send buffers to which devices are allocated 17 38 EIP_OT EtherNet IP Output Refresh WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 17 193 ...

Page 1082: ...is not the built in ET LAN To be set when the EtherNet IP function is set to Not Use in the Ethernet unit configuration To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification Set when a value outside the range is specified for the parameter To be set when the I O map node or connection that is specified by S1 or S2 does not exist Use this instruction only for the connection...

Page 1083: ...upper address of the destination device of the partner unit Higher byte Device type Hexadecimal 2 digit H0 to H8 Lower byte Upper address of the device Hexadecimal 2 digit H00 to HFF D2 Lower address of the device for the partner unit Hexadecimal 4 digit H0 to HFFFF 0 to 65535 D3 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word Available word devi...

Page 1084: ...specifying station numbers and memory addresses and executing the SEND and RECV instructions in a user program because PLC automatically creates messages according to the protocol Select a communication mode in the configuration menu of the tool software FPWIN GR7 When the SEND instruction is executed the data is read from the device that starts from S in the master unit and the data is stored in ...

Page 1085: ...imal H 3 Latch relay L Decimal H 4 Word Data register D Decimal H 5 File register R Decimal H 6 ZR Hexadecima l H 7 Link register W Hexadecima l H8 For the device address of the partner unit specify six digit hexadecimal three byte data that consists of the low byte of D1 and the value of D2 When the device address is in the range of H0 to H00FFFF specify H00 for the low byte of D1 Execution resul...

Page 1086: ...used to specify a slot number LAN port U100 and the connection number U1 The SEND instruction is executed with the address DT300 and the number of data U2 of FP7 the code H50 that indicates the device type and the upper address of the partner unite and the lower address H64 100 of the partner unit It is possible to check if a send error occurs by the sent flag Y70 when the sending flag Y90 turns O...

Page 1087: ...ng the operation state Do not write over it with a user program Note 2 The above I O numbers are those for the connections 1 to 16 Precautions for programming Use the UNITSEL instruction immediately before the SEND RECV instruction to specify a target connection number for communication Confirm the master communication clear to send flag of a corresponding connection is ON and execute the SEND REC...

Page 1088: ...ive data is smaller than the minimum received bytes that support header content check C061 The number of receive data is smaller than the minimum number of receive bytes 50 Note No reference destination Receive header check When a value other than 0x5000 is specified for the sub header the value consisting of the first byte of the subheader plus 0x80 is inserted in the high byte of the error code ...

Page 1089: ...pper address of the device Hexadecimal 2 digit H00 to HFF S2 Lower address of the device for the partner unit Hexadecimal 4 digit H0 to HFFFF 0 to 65535 n Number of received data 1 to 960 words 1 to 7168 bits D1 Starting address of the device area in the master unit that stores the received data D2 Starting address of the device area of the master unit that stores the execution result code 1 word ...

Page 1090: ...by specifying station numbers and memory addresses and executing the SEND and RECV instructions in a user program because PLC automatically creates messages according to the protocol Select a communication mode in the configuration menu of the tool software FPWIN GR7 When the RECV instruction is executed the data is read from the address that starts from S1 upper address S2 in the partner unit and...

Page 1091: ...ple When the device code is 3 internal relay and the two digit hexadecimal of the upper device address is H00 specify H300 Specify one of the following values as the high byte of S1 that indicates the device code of the partner unit Unit Device type High byte of S1 Bit Input X Hexadecimal H0 Output Y Hexadecimal H 1 Link relay B Hexadecimal H 2 Internal relay M Decimal H 3 Latch relay L Decimal H ...

Page 1092: ...s D000100 to D000101 of an external device is read and stored in the data registers DT300 to DT301 of FP7 After it is confirmed that connection 1 is established in master mode X90 and no transmissions are currently being executed for the same port Y90 the RECV instruction is started The UNITSEL instruction is used to specify a slot number LAN port U100 and the connection number U1 The RECV instruc...

Page 1093: ...receive processing Y70 to Y7F Sent flag Reports completion result of sending data in genera purpose communication or master communication Normal completion 0 Abnormal completion 1 Note 1 Each contact is used for reading the operation state Do not write over it with a user program Note 2 The above I O numbers are those for the connections 1 to 16 Exit codes when communication error occurs When a wr...

Page 1094: ...80 is inserted in the high byte of the error code Flag operations Name Description SR7 SR8 ER To be set in the case of out of range in indirect access index modification To be set when the destination range is outside the accessible range To be set when the slot number S1 specified with UNITSEL is not 100 built in ET LAN When there is not a connection that is specified with the UNITSEL instruction...

Page 1095: ... Directory Creation 18 30 18 6 CRMDIR CRMDIRFL Directory Deletion 18 33 18 7 CFDEL File Delete 18 36 18 8 CPR ASCII Data Write to File 18 38 18 9 CRD1 One Line Read from File 18 42 18 10 CREN File Rename 18 48 18 11 CCOPY File Copy 18 50 18 12 CMV File Move 18 53 18 13 CFREE Acquiring SD Memory Card Free Space 18 56 18 14 CFREEK Acquiring SD Memory Card Free Space 18 58 18 15 CFLS Acquiring File S...

Page 1096: ...e 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Binary data of n words is read from the area starting with S and the data is written on an SD memory card as a binary format file The folder name is data the file name is dtxxx bin The number specified by the operan...

Page 1097: ...be executed Confirm that the SD memory card access instruction execution done flag SR3B is turned OFF and turn OFF the execution condition Flag operations Name Description SR3A SD memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when in...

Page 1098: ...eal numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction reads n pieces of data from the binary format file in the SD memory card and stores it in the device of the address starting with D The folder name is data an...

Page 1099: ...er Therefore do not read the data in the range of data device processed by the CDTRD instruction after the start of the reading process until the completion When the number of data of the stored file is less than the specified number of data to be read data is read up to the number of data of the file An error occurs when there is no folder or no file with a specified file number in the folder Fla...

Page 1100: ...rmat unsigned 16 bit integer Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S n D1 D2 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation n items of data stored at the...

Page 1101: ...h name a folder name and a file name can be entered directly as a character constant Note 2 To specify a memory area such as a data register DT use the SSET instruction to store a path name a folder name and a file name as character data D2 to D2 6 Specification of writing format Operand Items Description D2 Write format Set value of D2 Write contents Fixed numb er of digits Extension H0 U1 DEC Un...

Page 1102: ...de 2 when completing writing to an SD memory card the end position of the newly saved data counting from the end of the file is stored in the areas D2 3 and D2 4 D2 4 D2 5 Number of written data Stores the number of data items that could be written after writing to the file Example 1 If the number of data items to be written is 40 and the file has 100 free spaces 40 is stored for the number of wri...

Page 1103: ...specified number of comma separated data pieces When U10 ASCII or U11 BIN is specified for D2 saving method the line break setting is invalid bit 8 Postfix Specifies the data to be added to the end of the write data when outputting to a CSV file 0 Insert a line break 0Dh 0Ah 1 Insert a comma 2Ch However lines with line breaks do not have a trailing comma bit 9 Zero suppression When outputting to a...

Page 1104: ...sion is ON and OFF D2 Specification of writing format Num ber of digits Zero suppression ON Zero suppression OFF 1 Unsigned 16 bit integer 5 0 00000 2 Signed 16 bit integer 6 0 00000 1 00001 3 Unsigned 32 bit integer 10 0 0000000000 4 Signed 32 bit integer 11 0 0000000000 1 0000000001 5 Floating point real number 32bit 13 0 000000000000 1 000000000001 1E 10 00000001E 10 1 234567 00001 234567 3 402...

Page 1105: ...le pointer If the writing operation is performed again in this state the next data will be written In case of the writing position specification mode 1 data is written in the file from the writing position file pointer counted from the head of the file In case of the writing position specification mode 2 data is written in the file from the writing position file pointer counted from the end of the...

Page 1106: ...d the data pieces are written in CSV format into the file abc data1 csv in the SD memory card in new file mode A blank line is inserted in the data through zero suppression and a comma 2Ch is inserted at the end 123456 1234567 12345678 123456789 1234 0Dh 0Ah H 0200 U3 H 0000 DT100 DT101 DT102 Writing format Writing mode Option bit0 7 0 Line break settings bit8 0 Postfix Writing file data1 csv H 00...

Page 1107: ...tion Amount of writing data U1 U12 U123 DT0 DT1 DT2 U1234 U12345 U5 DT3 DT4 DT5 U56 U567 U5678 U56789 DT6 DT7 DT8 DT9 S DT2 n 5 D1 abc data1 csv D2 DT100 bit0 7 3 Line break settings bit8 0 Postfix bit9 0 Zero suppression Insert a delimiter and a break before the third data Insert a line break 0Dh 0Ah OFF Head of device to be read U5 DT105 Amount of writing data DT106 Example 4 Five pieces five ch...

Page 1108: ...bit0 7 0 Line break settings bit8 1 Postfix bit9 0 Zero suppression Invalid Insert a comma 2Ch Invalid Head of device to be read U5 DT105 Amount of writing data DT106 Example 5 Six pieces six characters of ASCII data are read from the area starting with device DT2 and the data pieces are written in CSV format from the file pointer position of the existing file abc data1 csv in an SD memory card A ...

Page 1109: ...address Low Writing file data1 csv File pointer abcdef abcdef pqrstuvwxyz bit0 7 0 Line break settings bit8 1 Postfix bit9 0 Zero suppression Invalid Insert a comma 2Ch Invalid Head of device to be read Example 6 10000 pieces 10000 words of signed 16 bit integer data are read from the area starting with device DT10000 and the data pieces are written in CSV format into FP7 DT CSV in the SD memory c...

Page 1110: ...o be read H 00000000 U0 DT53 DT54 DT55 DT56 Writing position Writing file FP7 DT CSV U10000 DT55 Amount of writing data DT56 S DT10000 n 10000 D1 FP7 DT CSV D2 DT50 DT19999 DT19998 DT19997 DT10001 DT10002 bit8 0 Postfix Insert line break 0Dh 0Ah bit9 1 Zero suppression On indicates a space 20h DT20000 Processing examples bin format file Example 1 Five pieces five words of 16 bit data are read from...

Page 1111: ... to be read H 00000000 U0 DT103 DT104 DT105 DT106 Writing position Amount of writing data S DT2 n 5 D1 abc data1 bin D2 DT100 U5 DT105 Amount of writing data DT106 Example 2 Five pieces five words of 16 bit data are read from the area starting with device DT2 and the data pieces are written in the BIN format from the file pointer position of the existing file abc data1 bin in an SD memory card 18 ...

Page 1112: ... saving format 10 ASCII string character strings written from D2 are enclosed in double quotation marks and output A double quotation mark in character strings is converted to two double quotation marks When the set file attribute is read only any data cannot be written Flag operations Name Description SR3A SD memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution...

Page 1113: ...t device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 n D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction reads n pieces of data from the file in an SD memory card specified by S1 according to the paramet...

Page 1114: ...s to be read Saving format Set value of S2 Setting range of n 16 bit data U1 U2 U7 U11 0 to 65535 32 bit data U3 U4 U5 U8 0 to 32767 64 bit data U6 U9 0 to 16383 ASCII U10 U13 0 to 1999 S2 to S2 6 Specification of the data format for the data to be read Operand Description Description S2 Reading format Set value of S2 Read contents Extension U0 U1 DEC Unsigned 16 bit integer CSV comma separated te...

Page 1115: ...om the end of the file When the reading mode is set to the normal mode the file reading position is disabled Therefore data is always read from the head of a file In this case the storage to the reading position file pointer is not performed after the reading process S2 4 S2 5 Number of read data Stores the number of data items that could be read as a result of reading from the file Example 1 When...

Page 1116: ... H 0000 DT50 DT51 DT52 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 DT100 DT101 DT102 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 DT103 DT104 DT105 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 n 5 D DT102 Reading format Reading mode Reserved for system File pointer Data content of file data1 bin 16 bit BIN format 1027112712271327142715271627172718271927 H 0000 H 0000 H 1027 DT100 DT101 DT102 H 1127 H 1227 H 1327 DT103 DT104 DT105 H 1427...

Page 1117: ...er Data content of file data1 csv 16 bit DEC format 12 123 1234 12345 5 56 567 5678 56789 1 U0 U0 U12 DT100 DT101 DT102 U123 U1234 U12345 DT103 DT104 DT105 U5 U0 U0 U0 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 File pointer Data content of file data1 csv 16 bit DEC format 12 123 1234 12345 5 56 567 5678 56789 1 H 00000000 U0 DT53 DT54 DT55 Reading position No of read data DT56 Example 3 Five pieces of data are read ...

Page 1118: ...114 DT116 DT118 File pointer Data content of file data1 csv 32 bit DEC format 123456 1234567 12345678 123456789 567890 5678901 H 00000000 DT53 DT54 Reading position No of read data DT55 DT56 Example 4 Reads ten data ten characters of ASCII 000AH data from the file abc data1 csv in an SD memory card When using NULL as a delimiter When there are two consecutive double quotation marks each one is rea...

Page 1119: ...a content of file data1 csv ASCII string format ABC DE FGH IJ KLMNOP ABC DE FGH IJ KLMNOP H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 E A C B G H F D U0 DT53 DT54 DT55 Reading position No of read data DT56 Example 5 Reads four data four characters of ASCII 000AH data from the file abc data1 csv in an SD memory card When using NULL as a delimiter The data is stored in the area starting with D...

Page 1120: ...3 DT104 DT105 H 0000 DT106 DT107 DT108 H 0000 H 0000 DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 H 0000 DT106 DT107 DT108 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 0000 DT109 H 0000 H 00 H 00 H 0000 DT109 H 00 H 00 A Example 6 Reads three data three characters of ASCII 000DH data from the file abc data1 csv in an SD memory card When not using NULL as a delimiter The data is stored in t...

Page 1121: ...102 DT103 DT104 DT105 H 0000 DT106 DT107 DT108 H 0000 H 0000 DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 H 0000 DT106 DT107 DT108 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 NULL H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 0000 DT109 H 0000 H 00 H 00 H 0000 DT109 H 00 H 00 B A Example 7 10000 pieces of data are read from the file FP7 DT CSV in an SD memory card and the data pieces are stored in the area starting with DT10000 ...

Page 1122: ...his time other SD memory card access instructions cannot be executed When there are two consecutive double quotation marks in character strings each one is read as one character Double quotes alone are ignored If a space comma or line break is inserted at the position of file pointer after reading a CSV file the file pointer output to the result data is at the data position next to the comma or li...

Page 1123: ...struction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete...

Page 1124: ...nd Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Creates a folder within an SD memory card Specify by storing the number of characters...

Page 1125: ...te address Low Example 2 When creating a folder abc def in an SD memory card e d f High b DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 U8 a c H 0000 No of characters of folder name Folder name Byte address Low SD memory card SD memory card Folder name abc Created folder Folder name abc Folder name def Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions 18 5 ...

Page 1126: ...eated already exists no operation is performed and it ends normally Flag operations Name Description SR3A SD memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is compl...

Page 1127: ...an be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation The directory in the SD memory card specified by S is deleted To specify the folder name store the num...

Page 1128: ...dress Low Example 2 When deleting a folder abc def in an SD memory card Folder name abc Folder name def e d f High b DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 DT5 U8 a c H 0000 No of characters of folder name Folder name Byte address Low SD memory card SD memory card Deleted folder Folder name abc Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions 18 6 CRMDI...

Page 1129: ...there is a folder inside the folder an error occurs The CRMDIRFL instruction can be used for CPU units CPS4R CPS3R Flag operations Name Description SR3A SD memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution star...

Page 1130: ... and successive operand Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Files in the SD memory card specified by S are deleted Example o...

Page 1131: ... operations Name Description SR3A SD memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates th...

Page 1132: ...ecified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Adds the character string specified by S to the end of the file named with the character string specified by...

Page 1133: ...card and the number of characters of the file name Setting device Description D Specify the number of characters of the file name to be written Specify the full path D 1 Specify the file to be written The full path configuration is up to a maximum of 256 characters including the folder name filename Example of processing When writing a character string 2013 04 05 12 00 00 abcde01238 in a file abc ...

Page 1134: ... address Low 4 0 2 1 U30 0 3 DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 DT110 DT111 DT112 DT113 DT114 DT115 S DT100 i STR Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the execution condition has turned ON until the completion of the execution of the instruction During this time ot...

Page 1135: ... SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the character string specified by S exceeds 4096 characters 18 8 CPR ASCII Data Write to File WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 18 41 ...

Page 1136: ...an be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D1 D2 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction reads the file specified by S from the reading position specified by D2 up to a...

Page 1137: ...ion is executed D2 D2 1 is updated with a read pointer value that has had the number of bytes that were read added to it If the reading operation is performed again in this state the next data will be read The reading position can be specified by eight bits by one byte D2 1 D2 2 Maximum number of bytes to be read Setting range 1 to 4 096 Sets the maximum number of bytes in the read data The settin...

Page 1138: ... DT106 DT107 DT108 DT109 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 DT50 DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 H 00000000 U100 H 0000 H 0000 From the head of file Max size 100 bytes Reserved for system DT50 DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 H 0000000A U100 H 0000 H 0000 Read data Reading position at the end High DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 Low 5 7 6 8 1 3 U8 2 4 H 0000 DT106 DT107 H 0000 H 0000...

Page 1139: ...08 DT109 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 DT50 DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 H 00000004 U100 H 0000 H 0000 Position of 4th byte from the head of file Max size 100 bytes Reserved for system DT50 DT51 DT52 DT53 DT54 H 0000000A U100 H 0000 H 0000 Read data Reading position at the end High DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 Low 5 7 6 8 U4 H 0000 DT106 DT107 H 0000 H 0000 12...

Page 1140: ...igh DT100 DT101 DT102 DT103 DT104 DT105 Low a a b U10 DT106 DT107 H 0000 12345678 CRLF a ab abc abcd abcde CRLF Contents of file data1 txt Byte address H 0000 H 0000 DT108 DT109 H 0000 i STR DT8 H 0000 Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the execution c...

Page 1141: ...xecution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification To be set when the value of D2 2 exceeds 4096 characters To be set when D1 D2 2 is outside ...

Page 1142: ...haracters of the path name data format character data Specify the number of characters for S2 and path name folder name file name for S2 1 and successive operand The folder name can be omitted Devices that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S...

Page 1143: ...renaming abnormality is detected and operation abends if it does not match the folder name before renaming all path names Flag operations Name Description SD memory card access instruction active SR3A Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SD memory card access instruction execution done SR3B Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON ...

Page 1144: ...s that can be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation Copies the file specified by S1 to the file specified by S2 in ac...

Page 1145: ...amming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the execution condition has turned ON until the completion of the execution of the instruction During this time other SD memory card access instructions cannot be executed When a folder is specified for S1 and a file for S2 file name erro...

Page 1146: ...when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 18 11 CCOPY File Copy 18 52 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1147: ...ecified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S1 S2 S3 Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Integer constants and character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation This instruction moves the file specified by the character string data starting w...

Page 1148: ...autions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the execution condition has turned ON until the completion of the execution of the instruction During this time other SD memory card access instructions cannot be executed When the folder specified by S2 does not exist No...

Page 1149: ...s instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 18 12 CMV File Move WUME FP7CP...

Page 1150: ...WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D Outline of operation The SD memory card free space is stored in byte units in the area specified by D e g When the SD memory card has 4 GB of free space Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the execution condition h...

Page 1151: ...execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 18 13 CFREE Acquiring SD Memory Card Free Sp...

Page 1152: ...TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F D Outline of operation This instruction stores the amount of free space on an SD memory card in the area specified by D in k kilo bytes e g When the SD memory card has 4 GB of free space Precautions for programming Also refer to section 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions The SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3A turns ON after the exe...

Page 1153: ...execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is complete Normal end 0 abnormal end 1 SR7 SR8 ER To be set in case of out of range values in indirect access index modification 18 14 CFREEK Acquiring SD Memory Card Free S...

Page 1154: ... be specified indicated by Operan d 16 Bit device 32 Bit device Integer Real numbe r St rin g Index modifie r Note 1 W X W Y W R W L W S S D D T L D U M WI W O TS C S TE C E IX K Ｕ H SF D F S D Note 1 Only 16 bit devices can be modified Character constants cannot be specified Outline of operation The file name status specified by S is acquired and the result is stored in the 10 word area from D D ...

Page 1155: ... D 1 Reserved D 2 File size Stored as a decimal number D 3 D 4 Last modified Stored as a decimal number Year 0 to 99 D 5 Month 1 to 12 D 6 Day 1 to 31 D 7 Hour 0 to 23 D 8 Minute 0 to 59 D 9 Second 0 to 59 Example of processing Example When acquiring the status of the file abc data1 File attribute Read only File size 123456 bytes Last modified January 23 2012 at 12 34 56 18 15 CFLS Acquiring File ...

Page 1156: ... memory card access instruction execution in progress Turns ON when instruction execution starts Turns OFF when instruction execution is complete SR3B SD memory card access instruction execution complete Turns OFF when instruction execution starts Turns ON when instruction execution is complete SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result Indicates the execution results when instruction...

Page 1157: ... to read Panasonic SD memory card lifetime information This instruction and the ＳＤ card access instruction can be used at the same time This instruction stores the execution result of this instruction in the area starting with D1 D2 and D3 This instruction cannot be executed in duplicate Do not use this instruction frequently Executing this event by a differential instruction is recommended This i...

Page 1158: ...0 Note 1 The most significant bit of the execution result code can be used as a flag during execution Example of processing Example 1 When the execution result of the PanaSD instruction is Normal H FFFF DT10 DT11 DT13 D1 DT10 D2 DT11 to DT13 D3 DT15 DT14 DT15 DT12 When instruction is executed H FFFF DT10 DT11 DT13 DT14 DT15 DT12 When SD card information is being read H 0 DT10 DT11 DT13 DT14 DT15 D...

Page 1159: ... Name Description SR7 SR8 ER Set when the D2 to D2 2 range exceeds the accessible range Set when executed in an interrupt program 18 16 PanaSD Panasonic SD Memory Card Lifetime Information Read WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 18 65 ...

Page 1160: ... MEMO 18 66 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1161: ... in a program 19 7 19 5 2 Method to rewrite a value in the set value area 19 8 19 5 3 Method 1 Use the tool software FPWIN GR7 19 8 19 5 4 Method 2 Using a program high level instruction 19 9 19 6 Use of Duplicate Output 19 11 19 7 Rise Detection Method 19 14 19 8 Precautions for Programming 19 19 19 9 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions 19 21 19 10 Ethernet Function IP Addre...

Page 1162: ...sult is 0 in the case of overflow or underflow with instructions other than listed above Operation at the time of overflow and underflow The carry flag SR9 CY does not change even in the case of overflow or underflow Note that overflow or underflow may result if incorrect operation unit is specified Error flag Operation error flags are not cleared even in the case of normal operation Use ERR instr...

Page 1163: ...rs 0 to 23 SD54 Calendar timer minutes 0 to 59 SD55 Calendar timer seconds 0 to 59 SD56 Calendar timer day of the week 0 to 6 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat Instructions that handle clock or time data Mnemonic Operand Function HMSS S D Time data Seconds data SHMS S D Seconds data Time data CADD S1 S2 D Clock data Time data Clock data CSUB S1 S2 D Clock data Time data Clock data TMSEC S ...

Page 1164: ... allocated to each unit hours minutes and seconds and the overall time data are handled in the unit of 3 words Hours data can be specified in the range from 0 to 9999 Example DT0 is specified for operand Word Range DT0 Hours 0 to 9999 DT1 Minutes 0 to 59 DT2 Seconds 0 to 59 19 2 Clock and Time Data 19 4 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1165: ...ytes S Example A string data table is specified with the number of characters 5 and character data ABCDE H42 B H44 D H41 A H43 C H45 E 5 no of characters No of characters in a character string Character data Higher bytes Lower bytes DT0 DT1 DT2 DT3 DT4 Conversion of string data using the SSET instruction Using the SSET instruction a given string can be easily converted into a string data table The...

Page 1166: ...lt in an infinite value Note 2 Instructions indicated with result in an operation error Note 3 An operation error is output if the input value is out of the available range Infinitesimal input value Instru ction SIN COS TAN ASI N ACO S ATA N ATA N2 SIN H COS H TAN H EXP LN LOG PWR SQR Input value nan nan nan π 2 1 0 0 0 Note 1 Instructions indicated with nan result in an indefinite value Note 2 In...

Page 1167: ... return key 3 Press Ctrl F1 keys to execute Convert PBs 4 Press Yes Y after a confirmation message is displayed Operation and cautions after the change Timer counter in operation continues the pre change operation The program will start operating with the changed settings after the next execution condition changes from OFF to ON When a constant in a program is rewritten the program itself is overw...

Page 1168: ... itself is not overwritten even if a value in the set value area TS CS is changed Therefore operations as described below follow when the unit is switched to another mode and then returned to RUN or when it is powered off and then on again 1 When a set value is specified by a U constant The constant is preset in the set value area TS CS After the change the value will no longer be valid 2 When the...

Page 1169: ...n key The set value area is updated 19 5 4 Method 2 Using a program high level instruction When a set value for the timer counter is to be changed due to input conditions or for other reasons rewrite the value of the set value area TS of the timer counter to be changed using a high level instruction as described below Example Changing the set value to U20 when input R0 turns ON When R0 is ON the t...

Page 1170: ...e set value area and modifying the value to be transferred using the MV instruction etc It is also possible to specify the number of the set value area TS CS as an operand for the set value area 19 5 Changing Timer Counter Set Value in the RUN Mode 19 10 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1171: ...e outputs are identified the PB name address and error details duplicate outputs definition error are displayed 3 Select a given line and press the Jump button The cursor moves to the instruction where duplicate outputs are involved Enabling duplicate output If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicate output can be enabled In such cases switch CPU configuration...

Page 1172: ...R0 RST R0 SET This part of the program is processed as R0 ON Determination of operation result If the same output is used in duplicate by several instructions such as the OT instruction KP instruction SET instruction RST instruction or a transfer instruction the output obtained when I O refresh is performed is determined by the final operation results 19 6 Use of Duplicate Output 19 12 WUME FP7CPU...

Page 1173: ...Example The same output relay Y100 is used in the OT SET and RST instructions 19 6 Use of Duplicate Output WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 19 13 ...

Page 1174: ...ruction Executed in one scan only ON OFF ON OFF Rise detection method The previous execution condition is compared with the current execution condition and the instruction is executed only when the previous condition was OFF and the current condition is ON The instruction will not be executed otherwise Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection When RUN is started ...

Page 1175: ...t executed Executed If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is ON prior to switching to the RUN mode make a program as below using SR14 special internal relay SR14 is a special internal relay which is OFF during the first scan and turns ON at the second scan onwards Example 1 DF leading edge differential instruction X100 Y100 DF X100 Y100 DF SR14 Add SR14 X100 Y1...

Page 1176: ... execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the leading edge detection instruction is executed only if the previous condition was OFF and the current condition is ON They are not executed in any other circumstance Therefore take care that when a leading edge detection instruction is used in combination with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution ...

Page 1177: ...e input condition for the differential instruction has not been changed from OFF to ON after the previous execution Timing chart 2 X100 X101 Previous execution of differential instruction Y100 Differential output is obtained because X101 as the input condition for the differential instruction has been changed from OFF to ON after the previous execution 19 7 Rise Detection Method WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1178: ...tion condition for counter input has not been changed after the final timing of the previous non execution of JP instruction Timing chart 2 R0 X100 This is counted because counter input has been changed from OFF to ON after the final timing of the previous non execution of JP instruction Count operation Final timing of the previous non execution of JP instruction 19 7 Rise Detection Method 19 18 W...

Page 1179: ...d ON Example 2 Regardless of the ON or OFF state of X100 TMX5 is activated if X101 is turned ON Example 3 If X102 is set ON earlier Y101 does not go ON even when X100 is turned ON When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction or timer instruction do not use the ANS instruction RDS instruction or POPS instruction 19 8 Precautions for Program...

Page 1180: ...ams The invalid programs above can be respectively corrected in the following manner Program for correcting example 1 Program for correcting example 2 Program for correcting example 3 19 8 Precautions for Programming 19 20 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1181: ...on active flag If another SD memory card access instruction is being executed when starting an instruction the new instruction cannot be executed Flag operation Abnormal completion 1 Normal completion 0 SD memory card access instruction execution conditions SR3A SD memory card access instruction active flag SR3B SD memory card access instruction done flag SR3C SD memory card access instruction res...

Page 1182: ...eing logged is specified A file that is being accessed via FTP is specified Write delete move copy and rename instructions 12 The specified directory is not empty A directory or a file exists under the directory to be deleted CRMDIR At the time of execution 1 to 99 Others All instructions How to specify folder and file names in SD memory card access instructions Specify the full path up to 256 cha...

Page 1183: ...ion cannot be executed when another SD memory card access instruction is already being executed Do not execute the SD memory card access instruction until the active instruction is complete It may take several scans for the processing to complete Use in an interrupt program is not possible Character string data is set in the order of number of characters then character data Char 7 byte 6 Char 8 by...

Page 1184: ...rver address setting 000 000 000 000 127 000 000 000 to 127 255 255 255 224 000 000 000 to 224 255 255 255 239 000 000 001 to 239 255 255 255 240 000 000 001 to 240 255 255 255 247 000 000 001 to 247 255 255 255 248 000 000 001 to 248 255 255 255 255 000 000 001 to 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 Note 1 When an IP address that cannot be set is specified with an instruction an operation error will ...

Page 1185: ...P address OR net mask 255 255 255 255 Only when the router IP address is other than 000 000 000 000 the above combination judgment is performed for the routing setting The combination above may occur when masks are set to omission using IPv4SET instruction Example When the net mask is 255 255 0 0 set the IP address 0 0 255 255 using IPv4SET The set values for IP address net mask and default gatewa...

Page 1186: ... Note 3 The starting numbers of I O contacts of each unit including the CPU unit can be changed by the setting of tool software Common occupied areas that are used for Ethernet functions When using the Ethernet related functions flags for confirming the initialization connection of network and the completion of preparation are allocated Address Application X60 Disconnection detection relay 1 Disco...

Page 1187: ...ormal 0 Other than the above X6D EtherNet IP cyclic communication all nodes 1 Stop 0 Other than the above X6E EtherNet IP abnormal node 1 Exists 0 Does not exist X6F EtherNet IP start stop 1 Controllable 0 Not controllable 19 11 Ethernet Function I O Allocation WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 19 27 ...

Page 1188: ... MEMO 19 28 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1189: ...20 Appendix 20 1 List of System Relays 20 2 20 2 List of System Data Registers 20 9 20 3 Error Codes Table 20 17 20 4 ASCII Code Table JIS8 Code Table 20 23 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 20 1 ...

Page 1190: ...a registers SD8 to SD9 It indicates the first operation error that has occurred SR8 Operation error flag latest type Turns on every time an operation error occurs The PB number where an operation error has occurred is saved in the system data register SD10 and the address is saved in system data registers SD11 to SD12 Every time a new error occurs the data are updated It does not turn off even if ...

Page 1191: ...ollowing startup of any single process during stepladder control SR16 PB initial relay ON Turns on at the start of execution of a program block Turns off in the next scan SR17 PB initial relay OFF Turns off at the start of execution of a program block Turns on in the next scan SR18 0 01 second clock pulse relay Clock pulse with a 0 01 second cycle SR19 0 02 second clock pulse relay Clock pulse wit...

Page 1192: ...status SR27 SNTP time update completed Turns off when time is being updated with SNTP and turns on when the update is completed Note 1 SR28 Not used SR29 Forcing flag Turns on while forced input output operations are in progress SR2A Interrupt enable Turns on when interrupt is enabled SR2B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs SR2C Interrupting flag Turns on when an interrup...

Page 1193: ...rn off the trigger of the instruction ON Execution complete OFF Executing SR3C SD memory card access instruction execution result The execution result of SD memory card access instruction is stored Error codes are stored in system data register SD30 ON Error OFF Normal SR3D SD card logging graph aggregation in process ON Aggregating OFF Aggregation complete SR3E Not used SR3F SD memory card is bei...

Page 1194: ...oes not stop Turns off at the end of scan when buffer vacancy occurs while writing to a SD memory card is performed The buffer overflow counter SD120 is cleared to 0 After buffer vacancy occurred data logging is executed at the timing of logging to the buffer SR105 Logging trace error Turns on when an error is detected during the logging trace and stops the logging trace SR106 No SD memory card fr...

Page 1195: ... SR229 Logging trace control relay For LOG12 SR230 SR239 Logging trace control relay For LOG13 SR240 SR249 Logging trace control relay For LOG14 SR250 SR259 Logging trace control relay For LOG15 WS90 Device No Name Description SR900 Operation history No 0 active relay ON Active OFF Not in operation SR901 Operation history No 1 active relay SR902 Operation history No 2 active relay SR903 Operation ...

Page 1196: ...ttings error relay SR915 Operation history No 5 device settings error relay SR916 Operation history No 6 device settings error relay SR917 Operation history No 7 device settings error relay SR918 SR91F Not used WS100 WS149 Device No Name Description SR1000 to SR1499 Program block PB active relay Can monitor program blocks that are being started up SR1000 to SR1499 are allocated to 500 PBs Device N...

Page 1197: ...en a memory configuration inconsistency is detected information about the setting where the error has occurred is saved Bit No Description 0 Logging Trace settings 1 FTPc settings 2 HTTPc settings 3 Mailc settings 4 EIP settings 5 W PLC link settings 6 W2 PLC link settings SD7 Operation error occurrence PB number hold type Saves the PB number where the first operation error occurred after the unit...

Page 1198: ...m value Stores the minimum value SD24 Scan time maximum value Saves the maximum value SD25 SD26 Not used SD27 Interval for PB for execution at a specified interval Saves interval for PB for execution at a specified interval SD28 Not used Note 1 SD0 to SD5 are available only when the corresponding system relays SR0 to SR5 are on SD29 Device No Name Description SD29 Ethernet communication error code...

Page 1199: ...osition error The reading position or writing position is incorrect 9 SD memory card capacity shortage Cannot be executed because there is not enough free space on the SD memory card 10 Read format error Error in the conversion format when reading a file 11 File access contention A file that is being logged is specified A file that is being accessed via FTP is specified 12 The specified directory ...

Page 1200: ...0 Total ON number of error alarm relays Saves the total number of error alarm relays that are on Max 4096 relays By specifying SD60 in RST instruction all data in the error alarm buffer can be cleared SD61 No 1 error alarm relay that turned on Saves the number of the error alarm relay that turned on in the first place No 1 By specifying SD61 in RST instruction all data in the error alarm buffer ca...

Page 1201: ...FP7 MW Unit the error code is stored in the high byte and the unit number is stored in the low byte bit no 15 0 8 7 Error code Unit No SD91 FP7 MW Unit error annunciation register 2nd unit SD92 FP7 MW Unit error annunciation register 3rd unit SD93 FP7 MW Unit error annunciation register 4th unit SD94 FP7 MW Unit error annunciation register 5th unit SD95 FP7 MW Unit error annunciation register 6th ...

Page 1202: ...ata is lost during the buffer overflow register the buffer overflow counter as logging data SD121 Buffer overflow counter for LOG1 SD122 Buffer overflow counter for LOG2 SD123 Buffer overflow counter for LOG3 SD124 Buffer overflow counter for LOG4 SD125 Buffer overflow counter for LOG5 SD126 Buffer overflow counter for LOG6 SD127 Buffer overflow counter for LOG7 SD128 Buffer overflow counter for L...

Page 1203: ...e buffers SD232 Operating history No 2 Number of free buffers SD233 Operation history No 3 Number of free buffers SD234 Operation history No 4 Number of free buffers SD235 Operating history No 5 Number of free buffers SD236 Operating history No 6 Number of free buffers SD237 Operating history No 7 Number of free buffers SD238 SD239 Not used SD240 Operation history No 0 Update counter Stores a valu...

Page 1204: ...Device No Name Description SD246 Operation history No 6 Update counter SD247 Operation history No 7 Update counter SD248 SD254 Not used 20 2 List of System Data Registers 20 16 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1205: ... and steps to take 20 Syntax error Stop Auto clear A program with a syntax error has been written Switch to the PROG mode and correct the error 21 Duplicated use Stop Auto clear The same relay is used multiple times in OT instruction etc Switch to the PROG mode and correct the error Or set the duplicated output to enable in the CPU configuration Applicable devices and instructions are as follows O...

Page 1206: ...n the unit is set to the RUN mode again after the status has been corrected Error codes 40 to 55 Code Name Operatin g Error contents and steps to take 40 Copy failure Cover open Stop Auto clear The card cover is open and the copy process cannot be executed Close the cover 41 Copy failure No SD card Stop Auto clear Copying cannot be executed because there is no SD memory card Insert an SD memory ca...

Page 1207: ...e been collected in the CPU unit Verify the registered data 61 Duplicated or excessive registered I O maps Stop Auto clear There is an error with I O maps that have been registered in the CPU unit Verify the registered data 62 Interrupt error 1 Stop Auto clear There may be a hardware problem Please contact your dealer 63 Interrupt error 2 Stop Auto clear The interrupt program definition by INTPG i...

Page 1208: ...rature error 2 Select Default continue Note 1 For errors where Select is indicated in the Operation column either Stop or Continue can be selected in the configuration menu Error codes 120 to 129 132 to 134 1000 to 2999 Code Name Operating Error contents and steps to take 120 RTC data error Continue An error has been detected in clock data of the calendar timer 121 Power supply unit service lifeti...

Page 1209: ...ultiple frames procedure error Another command was received while multiple frame processing was in progress 60 Parameter error The specified parameter content does not exist or cannot be used 61 Data error There are errors in contact data area specification of data No size specification range or format specification 62 Registration over error The number of registrations has been exceeded or the un...

Page 1210: ... No support error An unsupported command was received 60 Parameter error The specified parameter content does not exist or cannot be used 61 Data error There are errors in contact data area specification of data No size specification range or format specification 62 Registration over error The number of registrations has been exceeded or the unit has been operated in an unregistered state 63 PC mo...

Page 1211: ...20 4 ASCII Code Table JIS8 Code Table Reference Table ASCII Codes 20 4 ASCII Code Table JIS8 Code Table WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 20 23 ...

Page 1212: ... x y z DEL 8 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 9 A ヲｱｲｳｴｵﾔﾕﾖｯ B ーアイウエオカキクケコサシスセソ C タチツテトナニヌネノハヒフヘホマ D ミムメモヤユヨラリルレロワン E F 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 C R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1...

Page 1213: ... 10 BKMV16 5 28 BSL 8 8 BSR 8 6 BSWAP 5 34 BTI 9 6 BTM 5 16 BTOA 14 30 BTR 9 4 BTS 9 2 BTT 9 8 BUFW 8 40 BUNI 7 27 C C 2 20 CADD 12 6 CALL 3 111 CCOPY 18 50 CDTRD 18 4 CDTWT 18 2 CE 2 35 CFDEL 18 36 CFLS 18 60 CFREE 18 56 CFREEK 18 58 CIPMGET 17 168 CIPMSET 17 162 CLC 9 11 CLOSE 17 41 CMKDIR 18 30 CMP 4 2 CMPR 8 30 CMPW 8 32 CMV 18 53 CNDE 3 93 COLM 7 36 COMB 6 42 Common Information for Subroutine...

Page 1214: ...130 ERR 13 13 16 27 ESADD 14 122 ESCMP 14 119 ESREP 14 142 ESSET 14 104 ESSRC 14 126 ETIMEstr 14 115 ETSTAT EtherNet IP 17 142 FTP HTTP SMTP 17 15 IP MAC Destination 17 5 EVENTC 10 33 EVENTT 10 36 EXP 11 23 EXT 7 8 EZPID 10 45 F FABS 11 43 FCAL 3 111 FIFR 8 37 FILTR 10 67 FINT 11 37 FIX 11 68 FLT 11 55 FNEG 11 41 FRINT 11 39 FTPcCTL 17 77 FTPcLOG 17 69 FTPcREQ 17 73 FTPcSET 17 59 FTPcSV 17 52 G GB...

Page 1215: ...R 3 6 6 36 OR 3 6 OR 3 139 OR 3 139 OR 3 139 OR 3 139 OR 3 139 OR 3 139 ORS 3 20 OT 2 25 3 3 OT 3 27 OT 3 27 P P 2 22 PanaSD 18 63 PERRD 13 23 pGPSEND 15 4 PID 10 39 PINGREQ 17 28 PMGET 15 58 16 10 16 14 16 18 PMSET 15 51 16 20 16 23 POPIX 5 44 POPS 3 22 POSSET 13 19 pPMSET 15 51 16 20 16 23 PRINT 14 64 PSHS 3 22 PSTRD 13 21 PUSHIX 5 42 PWR 11 29 R R 2 18 RAD 11 33 RAMP 10 57 RBUFW 8 47 RCL 8 28 R...

Page 1216: ... 3 ST 3 8 ST 3 8 ST 3 3 ST 3 133 ST 3 133 ST 3 133 ST 3 133 ST 3 133 ST 3 133 STARTPG 3 127 STC 9 10 STDDEV 10 30 STOD 11 45 STOPPG 3 127 STPE 3 95 SUB 6 4 SUMMER 12 16 SWAP 5 32 T T 2 19 TAN 11 7 TANH 11 21 TE 2 35 TIMEstr 14 75 TIMEWT 12 14 TM 3 36 TM16 3 46 TMSEC 12 10 TS 2 33 U U 2 41 UCLR 13 26 UDC 3 66 UM 2 30 UNIF 11 52 UNIT 7 23 UNITSEL 15 2 W WBSL 8 20 WBSR 8 18 WDTRES 13 15 WI 2 32 WIN 4...

Page 1217: ...DROFF LOGST LOGED SMPL CDTWT CDTRD CWT CRD CMKDIR CRMDIR CFDEL CPR CRD1 CREN CCOPY CMV CFREE CFREEK CFLS 2 FP7 CPU Unit Users Manual Ethernet Expansion Function Apr 2014 BCMP GETSTNO PGPSEND IPv4SET CONSET ETSTAT OPEN CLOSE PINGREQ FTPcSV FTPcSET FTPcLOG FTPcREQ FTPcCTL HTTPcSV HTTPcSET HTTPcREQ HTTPcCTL SMTPcSV SMTPcADD SMTPcSET SMTPcREQ SMTPcLOG SMTPcCTL 3 FP7 CPU Unit Ver 3 20 Additional Functi...

Page 1218: ...s instruction execution result error Added list of error codes Errors corrected Sep 2019 WUME FP7CPUPGR 04 4th Edition Added instructions related to operation history OPHST OPHED OPHCLR OPHSAVE Added items to list of system relays Added items to list of system data registers Added items to list of error codes Errors corrected Mar 2020 WUME FP7CPUPGR 05 5th Edition Added Ethernet communication inst...

Page 1219: ...Date Manual No Record of Changes Errors corrected Nov 2022 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 12th Edition Changed product type following FP7 update Changed manual formatting Errors corrected WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1220: ... MEMO WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1221: ... MEMO WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Page 1222: ...td Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd https panasonic net id pidsx global Please visit our website for inquiries and about our sales network Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd 2022 November 2022 WUME FP7CPUPGR 12 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for FP7 Series

Brand: Parker Pages: 344

Brand: Campbell Pages: 42

BIC 1I12-P2A25-M30MI1-BPX05-110

Brand: Balluff Pages: 12

Brand: Garland Pages: 43

Brand: OpenVox Pages: 13

HHM Series HHM2245SA1

Brand: TDK Pages: 2

Brand: Disc Makers Pages: 38

Brand: EMTRUST Pages: 103

Brand: Network Critical Pages: 200

Brand: Xenteq Pages: 16

Brand: Maxtor Pages: 2

Brand: Advantech Pages: 66

Brand: IEI Technology Pages: 4

Brand: netsys Pages: 164

Brand: Spirent Pages: 22

SteelCentral NetExpress 470

Brand: Riverbed Pages: 140

Brand: Rane Pages: 6

Brand: Forcepoint Pages: 2

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands